Sharp Z 336j User Manual

Version 1.0  
Produced in June 2002  
R
Sharp Programmable Controller  
Module name  
JW-20FL5  
JW-20FLT  
JW-50FL  
Z-336J  
FL-net  
User's Manual  
Safety Precautions  
Read this manual and attached documents carefully before installation, operation, maintenance and check-  
ing in order to use the machine correctly. Understand all of the machine knowledge, safety information, and  
cautions before starting to use. In this instruction manual, safety precautions are ranked into "danger" and  
"caution" as follows.  
Danger  
Caution  
: Wrong handling may possibly lead to death or heavy injury.  
: Wrong handling may possibly lead to medium or light injury.  
Even in the case of  
Caution , a serious result may be experienced depending on  
the circumstances. Anyway, important points are mentioned. Be sure to observe them  
strictly.  
The picture signs of prohibit and compel are explained below.  
: It means don'ts. For example, prohibition of disassembly is indicated as (  
: It means a must. For example, obligation of grounding is indicated as (  
1) Installation  
).  
).  
Caution  
- Use in the environments specified in the user's manual.  
Electric shock, fire or malfunction may be caused when used in the environments of high  
temperature, high humidity, dusty or corrosive atmosphere, vibration or impact.  
- Install according to the user's manual.  
Wrong installation may cause drop, breakdown, or malfunction.  
- Never admit wire chips or foreign matters.  
Or fire, breakdown or malfunction may be caused.  
2) Wiring  
Compel  
- Be sure to ground for programmable controller.  
Unless grounded, electric shock or malfunction may be caused.  
Caution  
- Connect the rated power source.  
Connection of a wrong power source may cause a fire.  
- Wiring should be done by qualified electrician.  
Wrong wiring may lead to fire, breakdown or electric shock.  
Caution  
- Make sure to follow the descriptions in the instruction manual and user manual when wiring  
and installing a module/board.  
Make sure to supply the electricians with the wiring and installation requirements.  
If the wiring or installation do not meet the specifications, there may be a drop in the modules  
ability to reject noise, or the modules may malfunction.  
3) Use  
Danger  
- Don't touch the terminal while the power is being supplied or you may have an electric shock.  
- Assemble the emergency stop circuit and interlock circuit outside of the programmable  
controller. Otherwise breakdown or accident damage of the machine may be caused by the  
trouble of the programmable controller.  
Caution  
- Change of program during operation, or "Run" or "stop" during operation should be done with  
particular care by confirming safety. Misoperation may lead to damage or accident of the  
machine.  
- Turn on the power source in the specified sequence. Turning ON with wrong sequence may  
lead to machine breakdown or accident.  
4) Maintenance  
Prohibit  
- Don't disassemble or modify the modules.  
Or fire, breakdown or malfunction may be caused.  
Caution  
- Turn OFF the power source before detaching or attaching the module/board.  
Or electric shock, malfunction or breakdown may be caused.  
     
User's Manual  
Chapter 1: Outline  
Chapter 2: Handling Precautions  
Chapter 3: System Configuration  
Chapter 4: Name and Function of Each Part  
Chapter 5: Installation  
Chapter 6: Connection/Wiring  
Chapter 7: Use Guide  
Chapter 8: Cyclic Transfer  
Chapter 9: Message Transfers  
Chapter 10: Communication Control  
Chapter 11: SEND/RECEIVE Function  
Chapter 12: Parameters  
Chapter 13: Troubleshooting  
Chapter 14: Specifications  
Chapter 15: Appendix  
Alphabetical Index  
Table of Contents  
Chapter 1: Outline ...................................................................................................... 1-1  
Chapter 2: Handling Precautions ............................................................................. 2-1  
Chapter 3: System Configuration ............................................................................. 3-1  
Chapter 4: Name and Function of Each Part .................................................... 4-1 to 4  
4-1 JW-20FL5 ..................................................................................................................................... 4-1  
4-2 JW-20FLT ..................................................................................................................................... 4-2  
4-3 Z-336J........................................................................................................................................... 4-3  
4-4 JW-50FL ....................................................................................................................................... 4-4  
Chapter 5: Installation ........................................................................................ 5-1 to 8  
5-1 Installation of JW-20FL5/20FLT .................................................................................................... 5-1  
5-2 Installation of Z-336J .................................................................................................................... 5-2  
[1] Maximum number of boards to mount........................................................................................ 5-3  
[2] Address allocation of I/O relay.................................................................................................... 5-4  
(1) When mounted on Z-311J/312J .......................................................................................... 5-4  
(2) When mounted on Z-313J ................................................................................................... 5-5  
(3) When mounted on Z-511J ................................................................................................... 5-6  
5-3 Installation of JW-50FL ................................................................................................................. 5-8  
Chapter 6: Connection/Wiring ........................................................................... 6-1 to 9  
6-1 Installing an Ethernet cable .......................................................................................................... 6-1  
[1] Equipment layout........................................................................................................................ 6-1  
[2] Wiring ......................................................................................................................................... 6-1  
6-2 Connection.................................................................................................................................... 6-2  
[1] Connection of JW-20FL5............................................................................................................ 6-2  
(1) Connecting the transciever cable ........................................................................................ 6-2  
(2) Wiring the power source...................................................................................................... 6-3  
[2] When connecting to a JW-20FLT ............................................................................................... 6-4  
[3] Connection of Z-336J ................................................................................................................. 6-5  
(1) When connecting to a 10BASE5 ......................................................................................... 6-5  
(2) When connecting to a 10BASE-T........................................................................................ 6-7  
[4] Connection of JW-50FL.............................................................................................................. 6-8  
(1) When connecting to a 10BASE5 ......................................................................................... 6-8  
(2) When connecting to a 10BASE-T........................................................................................ 6-9  
Chapter 7: Use Guide........................................................................................ 7-1 to 30  
7-1 Ethernet ........................................................................................................................................ 7-1  
[1] 10BASE5 system ....................................................................................................................... 7-1  
[2] 10BASE-T system ...................................................................................................................... 7-4  
[3] IP addresses on an Ethernet ...................................................................................................... 7-5  
7-2 FL-net ........................................................................................................................................... 7-6  
[1] Description of the FL-net ............................................................................................................ 7-6  
[2] The number of modules and their node numbers ...................................................................... 7-8  
[3] Data communication type ........................................................................................................... 7-9  
(1) Cyclic transfer.................................................................................................................... 7-10  
(2) Message transfer............................................................................................................... 7-10  
[4] Transfer data volume................................................................................................................ 7-10  
(1) Cyclic transfer.................................................................................................................... 7-10  
(2) Message transfer................................................................................................................7-11  
[5] Transfer cycle ............................................................................................................................7-11  
[6] Data area and memory............................................................................................................. 7-12  
[7] Communication management table.......................................................................................... 7-13  
(1) Local node management table .......................................................................................... 7-13  
(2) Participating node management table ............................................................................... 7-14  
(3) Network management table .............................................................................................. 7-14  
[8] Cyclic transfer and data area ................................................................................................... 7-15  
(1) Outline of the cyclic transfer process ................................................................................ 7-15  
(2) Common memory .............................................................................................................. 7-16  
(3) Area 1 and area 2 .............................................................................................................. 7-17  
(4) Guarantee of simultaneity ................................................................................................. 7-18  
[9] Message transfers ................................................................................................................... 7-19  
(1) Outline of the message transfer process........................................................................... 7-19  
(2) Table of support messages ............................................................................................... 7-20  
(3) Details of the support messages ....................................................................................... 7-21  
Chapter 8: Cyclic Transfer................................................................................ 8-1 to 13  
8-1 Setting procedures........................................................................................................................ 8-3  
8-2 Areas that can be allocated as the common memory area........................................................... 8-4  
(1) For the JW20H or J-board (Z-300 series) ........................................................................... 8-4  
(2) For the JW30H or J-board (Z-500 series) ........................................................................... 8-5  
(3) For the JW50H/70H/100H ................................................................................................... 8-6  
8-3 Parameter settings for cyclic transfers.......................................................................................... 8-7  
[1] Word addresses used for the top address.................................................................................. 8-8  
(1) For the JW20H or J-board (Z-300 series) ........................................................................... 8-8  
(2) For the JW30H or J-board (Z-500 series) ........................................................................... 8-9  
(3) For the JW50H/70H/100H ..................................................................................................8-11  
8-4 Communication time ................................................................................................................... 8-13  
[1] Token round time ...................................................................................................................... 8-13  
[2] Round time when a communication error occurs ..................................................................... 8-13  
Chapter 9: Message Transfers ......................................................................... 9-1 to 47  
9-1 Message sending procedures and data reception details ............................................................ 9-2  
9-2 Transmission buffer....................................................................................................................... 9-4  
[1] Allocation of available areas for the transmission buffer ............................................................ 9-5  
(1) For the JW20H or J-board (Z-300 series) ........................................................................... 9-5  
(2) For the JW30H or J-board (Z-500 series) ........................................................................... 9-6  
(3) For the JW50H/70H/100H ................................................................................................... 9-7  
9-3 Message transaction codes and execution conditions ................................................................. 9-8  
9-4 Use of virtual address space and PC memory space ................................................................... 9-9  
(1) For the JW20H or J-board (Z-300 series) ......................................................................... 9-10  
(2) For the JW30H or J-board (Z-500 series) ..........................................................................9-11  
(3) For the JW50H/70H/100H ................................................................................................. 9-14  
9-5 Computer link function ................................................................................................................ 9-16  
[1] Setting the computer link to send and receive data ................................................................. 9-17  
[2] Basic format of computer link commands ................................................................................ 9-19  
(1) Communication format ...................................................................................................... 9-19  
(2) Memory address expression format .................................................................................. 9-20  
(3) Execution condition ........................................................................................................... 9-21  
(4) Table of commands ........................................................................................................... 9-22  
[3] Descriptions of each command ................................................................................................ 9-23  
[4] Computer link error code table ................................................................................................. 9-42  
[5] Two-layer communication with the Ethernet............................................................................. 9-43  
9-6 Remote programming and remote monitor functions ................................................................. 9-45  
[1] Function.................................................................................................................................... 9-45  
[2] Example operation ................................................................................................................... 9-46  
Chapter 10: Communication Control .............................................................. 10-1 to 6  
[1] Participating nodes list flag....................................................................................................... 10-2  
[2] Operation status flag ................................................................................................................ 10-3  
[3] Error status flag ........................................................................................................................ 10-4  
[4] Local node management table ................................................................................................. 10-5  
[5] Participating node management table ...................................................................................... 10-6  
[6] Network management table ..................................................................................................... 10-6  
Chapter 11: SEND/RECEIVE function.............................................................. 11-1 to 8  
11-1 Operation of SEND/RECEIVE instruction ..................................................................................11-2  
[1] SEND ........................................................................................................................................11-2  
(1) When the module is used (host PC: JW30H, J-board (Z-500 series)) ...............................11-2  
(2) When the module is used (host PC: JW50H/70H/100H)..................................................... 113  
[2] RECEIVE...................................................................................................................................11-5  
(1) When the module is used (host PC: JW30H, J-board (Z-500 series)) ...............................11-5  
(2) When the module is used (host PC: JW50H/70H/100H)....................................................11-6  
11-2 Timeout time for SEND/RECEIVE instructions ..........................................................................11-8  
Chapter 12: Parameters .................................................................................... 12-1 to 5  
12-1 Table of parameters .................................................................................................................. 12-1  
12-2 Details of each of the parameters ............................................................................................. 12-2  
(1) Enable/disable the use of the transmission buffer (Setting parameter address 37(8)) ..... 12-2  
12-3 How to set parameters.............................................................................................................. 12-3  
[1] When the JW-20FL5/20FLT or Z-366J is used......................................................................... 12-3  
[2] When the JW-50FL is used ...................................................................................................... 12-4  
Chapter 13: Troubleshooting ........................................................................... 13-1 to 6  
13-1 Before you conclude that the machine is faulty ........................................................................ 13-1  
13-2 General network problems and countermeasures .................................................................... 13-2  
[1] Problems concerning the network and appropriate countermeasures (when unable to communi-  
cate) ......................................................................................................................................... 13-2  
[2] Problems concerning the network and appropriate countermeasures (when communications are  
unstable)................................................................................................................................... 13-3  
[3] How to check an IP address using the Ping function on a personal computer ........................ 13-4  
13-3 General precautions related to the FL-net ................................................................................ 13-5  
13-4 Error indicators on the display panel ........................................................................................ 13-6  
Chapter 14: Specifications ............................................................................... 14-1 to 5  
14-1 JW-20FL5/20FLT ...................................................................................................................... 14-1  
[1] General specifications .............................................................................................................. 14-1  
[2] Communication specifications .................................................................................................. 14-1  
[3] External dimension drawings ................................................................................................... 14-2  
14-2 Z-336J....................................................................................................................................... 14-3  
[1] General specifications .............................................................................................................. 14-3  
[2] Communication specifications .................................................................................................. 14-3  
[3] External dimension drawings ................................................................................................... 14-3  
14-3 JW-50FL ................................................................................................................................... 14-4  
[1] General specifications .............................................................................................................. 14-4  
[2] Communication specifications .................................................................................................. 14-4  
[3] External dimension drawings ................................................................................................... 14-5  
Chapter 15: Appendix ..................................................................................... 15-1 to 63  
15-1 System configuration guide ...................................................................................................... 15-1  
[1] Brief description of the Ethernet ............................................................................................... 15-1  
[2] 10BASE5 Specifications........................................................................................................... 15-2  
[3] 10BASE-T Specifications ......................................................................................................... 15-3  
[4] Other Ethernet Specifications................................................................................................... 15-4  
(1) 10BASE2 ........................................................................................................................... 15-4  
(2) Optical Ethernet Specifications ......................................................................................... 15-4  
15-2 Examples of system configurations .......................................................................................... 15-5  
[1] Small scale configuration ......................................................................................................... 15-5  
[2] Basic configuration ................................................................................................................... 15-6  
[3] Configuration of a large-scale network ..................................................................................... 15-7  
[4] Configuration of a long distance distribution system ................................................................ 15-8  
[5] Configuration of local concentrations ....................................................................................... 15-9  
[6] Configuration combining local and long distance distribution................................................. 15-10  
[7] Principles of the FL-net system ...............................................................................................15-11  
[8] Differences between a general-purpose Ethernet and FL-net ................................................15-11  
15-3 Definition of network systems ................................................................................................. 15-12  
[1] Communication protocol standards ........................................................................................ 15-12  
[2] Hierarchical structure of the communication protocols........................................................... 15-12  
[3] Physical implementations of an FL-net .................................................................................. 15-13  
[4] IP addresses on the FL-net .................................................................................................... 15-13  
[5] FL-net sub net mask............................................................................................................... 15-14  
[6] TCP/IP, UDP/IP protocols ....................................................................................................... 15-14  
[7] FL-net port number................................................................................................................. 15-14  
[8] FL-net data format .................................................................................................................. 15-15  
(1) Outline of the FL-net data format .................................................................................... 15-15  
(2) FL-net header format....................................................................................................... 15-17  
[9] FL-net transaction code.......................................................................................................... 15-17  
15-4 Network control of the FL-net ................................................................................................. 15-19  
[1] Token control of the FL-net..................................................................................................... 15-19  
(1) Token ............................................................................................................................... 15-19  
(2) Flow of the token ............................................................................................................. 15-20  
(3) Token and data ................................................................................................................ 15-21  
(4) Interval between frames (minimum allowable interval between frames) ......................... 15-22  
[2] Joining and leaving an FL-net network................................................................................... 15-23  
(1) Participation in the FL-net ............................................................................................... 15-23  
(2) Leaving an FL-net network .............................................................................................. 15-25  
[3] Node status control ................................................................................................................ 15-26  
[4] FL-net Local node management table.................................................................................... 15-26  
[5] FL-net Participating node management table ........................................................................ 15-27  
[6] Status management of the FL-net .......................................................................................... 15-28  
[7] Control message sequence number of the FL-net ................................................................. 15-28  
15-5 Parts needed to build a network ............................................................................................. 15-29  
[1] Parts needed to configure an Ethernet................................................................................... 15-29  
[2] Parts related to 10BASE5 ...................................................................................................... 15-30  
(1) Transceiver ...................................................................................................................... 15-30  
(2) Coaxial cable ................................................................................................................... 15-35  
(3) Coaxial connectors .......................................................................................................... 15-35  
(4) Relay connector .............................................................................................................. 15-36  
(5) Terminator (terminating resistor) ..................................................................................... 15-36  
(6) Ground terminal of a coaxial cable .................................................................................. 15-37  
(7) Transceiver cable ............................................................................................................ 15-37  
(8) 10BASE5/10BASE-T converter ....................................................................................... 15-38  
(9) Coaxial/optical converter, repeater .................................................................................. 15-39  
[3] 10BASE-T related items ......................................................................................................... 15-40  
(1) Hub .................................................................................................................................. 15-40  
(2) 10BASE-T cable .............................................................................................................. 15-41  
(3) 10BASE-T/optical converter, repeater ............................................................................. 15-41  
15-6 Installation of an FL-net network............................................................................................. 15-42  
[1] Wiring 10BASE5 coaxial cable ............................................................................................... 15-42  
[2] 10BASE-T (UTP) .................................................................................................................... 15-56  
15-7 Grounding the FL-net system ................................................................................................. 15-58  
[1] Outline of the grounding procedures for the FL-net system ................................................... 15-58  
[2] Wiring power lines and grounding equipment ........................................................................ 15-59  
[3] Wiring the power lines and grounding the network equipment in an FL-net .......................... 15-60  
[4] Installation of network equipment in an FL-net....................................................................... 15-61  
[5] Wiring and grounding through wiring ducts and conduits....................................................... 15-62  
15-8 FL-net installation check sheet ............................................................................................... 15-63  
Alphabetical Index ............................................................................................... I-1 to 3  
Chapter 1: Outline  
1
An FL-net module (JW-20FL5/20FLT, JW-50FL, FL-net board (Z-336J)) is an interface module use to connect a  
programmable controller (JW20H/30H, JW50H/70H/100H), J-board to an FL-net. FL-net is an open network  
that connects production equipment and controllers from multiple FA (factory automation) venders, to create a  
unified production process. This network works as an intermediary between information networks and produc-  
tion networks, and makes it possible to connect control devices (such as personal computers or programmable  
controllers, hereafter referred to as PCs), to numeric control devices (CNCs), and robot controllers (RCs). The  
Ethernet is used as a world standard communication method to allow communication between pieces of OA  
(Office Automation) equipment.  
Server  
Personal  
computer  
Personal  
computer  
Personal  
computer  
EWS  
WAN  
Information network (Ethernet)  
FL-net  
Gateway  
Nut  
Graphic  
panel  
runner  
Robot  
controller  
Image  
Printer  
BCR  
ID  
PC  
NC  
Personal  
computer  
Field network  
Sensor  
actuator  
FL-net employs an FA link protocol as an application layer.  
Features of the FA link protocol  
1Uses the Ethernet UDP/IP communication protocol.  
2Using a Master-less, Token method, the system prevents data transmission conflicts and guarantees  
the transfer of data within a specified time.  
3Employs a shared memory system (shares information between each of the nodes).  
4Nodes can automatically enter and leave the network.  
Features of the JW-20FL5/20FLT, JW-50FL, Z-336J  
1FL-net compatible (uses the FA link protocol)  
2Supports cyclic transfers and message transfers.  
3Supports exchange of data between SHARP PCs using the SEND/RECEIVE function. (A unique  
function of SHARP equipment)  
4Allows remote programming and remote monitor functions between SHARP PCs. (A unique function of  
SHARP equipment)  
- FL-net is an open network that was standardized by the Japan FA Open Systems Promotion Group (JOP) in  
the Manufacturing Science Technology Center (MSTC).  
- Ethernet is a registered trademark of XEROX CORPORATION, USA.  
1-1  
Chapter 2: Handling Precautions  
Make sure to follow the precautions bellow who using the JW-20FL5/20FLT, JW-50FL (hereafter referred to  
as this module) and Z-336J (hereafter referred to as this board).  
(1) Installation  
2
- Do not install or store this unit in the following conditions.  
1 Locations close to a heating element  
2Sudden temperature changes which may cause condensation  
3Corrosive or inflammable gas  
4Vibration or hard jolts  
- The minimum distance between nodes is specified in the regulations. (2.5 m when the 10BASE5  
is used.) When connecting devices, be sure to maintain these minimum distances.  
Cables used for 10BASE5 systems have marks every 2.5 m. Position each transceiver directly  
on one of these marks.  
- Mount the transceivers on electrically insulated objects, such as a wooden mounting block.  
- Prior to installing or detaching the JW20H/30H or JW50H/70H/100H, make sure to turn OFF the  
power supply to the PCs.  
- Prior to connect the board, make sure to turn OFF the power to the J-board.  
- Isolate the hub case electrically from the control panel chassis.  
(2) Treatment  
JW-20FL5/20FLT and JW-50FL  
- For ventilation, holes are provided in the cabinet to prevent a temperature rise. Do not block  
the ventilation holes. Good ventilation is necessary.  
- Never allow a liquid such as water and chemical solution and a metallic object like a copper wire  
inside this module to avoid a possible hazard. Otherwise, it may be a cause of machine  
trouble.  
- When a trouble or abnormal condition such as overheat, fume, or smoke is met, stop the  
operation immediately, and call your dealer or our service department.  
Z-336J  
A J-board is a PC board which contains sensitive electronic parts. Therefore, be careful when han-  
dling it.  
1Before touching the board with your hand, make sure to discharge all static electricity from  
your body.  
2Do not touch the board if your hands are dirty or wet.  
3Do not put the board down on a conductive object (such as a metal plate).  
(If a J-board with a CPU is placed on a conductive object, the battery terminals may be short  
circuited and the back up memory will be lost.)  
4Do not handle any switches, connectors, or terminal blocks on the J-board using excessive  
force.  
(3) Grounding  
- Connect the J-board FG terminal (on the terminal block on the CPU board) to an independent  
class 3 ground. Do not share the ground with high voltage equipment.  
- The hexagonal standoffs (supplied with each board) for assembling the J-board are used for  
connecting the ground (FG). Make sure to tighten them securely.  
(4) Wiring precautions  
- Install the communication lines at a distance of 60 cm or more away from motor power lines or  
high voltage lines.  
- Do not route wires near equipment that generates electrical noise.  
- Use category 5 10BASE-T shielded twisted pair cable.  
- Use an isolated shield transformer to provide power to the hubs.  
- We recommend using a transceiver cable that is 2 m or shorter.  
2-1  
Chapter 3: System Configuration  
[Connection example]  
Personal  
computer  
10BASE5 coaxial cable (max. 500 m)  
Transceiver  
Hub  
FL-net  
Terminator  
3
J-board JW20H/30H JW50H/70H/100H  
RC  
Transceiver  
cable  
(max. 50 m)  
NC  
10BASE-T  
twisted pair cable  
(max. 100 m)  
Other  
maker’s  
PC  
JW-20FL5  
Z-336J  
RC  
JW-50FL  
JW50H/70H  
J-board  
JW20H/30H  
JW-20FLT  
   /100H  
Z-336J  
JW-50FL  
- A basic system (segment) configuration consists of a 10BASE5 coaxial cable between 10m and 500 m long  
with nodes connected to this cable. (A maximum of 100 nodes can be connected per segment)  
- If the distance between nodes exceeds 500 m, use a repeater (maximum length 2,500 m).  
See 7-1[1] 10BASE5 system.  
Note: 10BASE5 coaxial cable, transceivers, transceiver cables, terminators, hubs, and 10BASE-T twisted  
pair cable is supplied and installed by the customer.  
3-1  
Chapter 4: Name and Function of Each Part  
4-1 JW-20FL5  
1Display panel  
-
JW 20FL5  
LN TX RX 12V  
T
PE HE  
S7 S6 S5 S4 S3 S2 S1 S0  
6Module No. switch  
(Factory setting: 0)  
2Connector for programmer  
Connector for shield  
switch for 10BASE5  
4
4
ON  
3Connector for 10BASE5  
S
H
I
E
L
D
2
1
4
0
5
9
6
7
OFF  
512 VDC power supply input terminal  
(Factory setting: ON)  
FG  
7Reset switch  
(Front)  
(Rear)  
Name  
Function  
Display panel  
Displays the JW-20FL5 operating status using LEDs.  
LN  
TX  
RX  
Lights when communicating normally.  
Blink at transmitting data.  
Blink at receiving data.  
12 V  
Lights when 12 VDC is supplied. (Only when 10BASE5 is used.)  
Lights at test mode. (Normally, this is not used.)  
Lights at parameter setting error.  
1
T
PE  
HE  
Lights at this module error.  
Displays the station number when operating normally. Displays an error  
code if an error occurs.  
S0 to S7  
Connect a JW-14PG programmer or similar equipment to set the  
parameters on the JW-20FL5.  
Connector for programmer  
2
Connect the 10BASE5 transceiver cable.  
Make sure to slide the lock securely to the "lock" position.  
Connector for 10BASE5  
3
The shield on the coaxial cable and the FG (base) terminal on this  
module will be shorted together.  
ON  
Connector for  
Shield switch  
for 10BASE5  
4
5
The shield on the coaxial cable is not shorted to the base.  
- Ground the FG line on the 12 VDC connector separately.  
OFF  
When 10BASE5 is used, connect a commercially available DC power  
supply that is designed to supply power to transceivers. The DC power  
supply must provide 12VDC ±5% and 0.5 A or more.  
12 VDC power supply  
input terminal  
Specify a module number from 0 to 6.  
- Be careful do not use the same number for another option module.  
Module No. switch  
Reset switch  
6
7
Only used by SHARP engineers. Users should not press this switch.  
4-1  
Chapter 4: Name and Function of Each Part  
4-2 JW-20FLT  
1Display panel  
-
JW 20FLT  
LN TX RX 12V  
T
PE HE  
S7 S6 S5 S4 S3 S2 S1 S0  
5Module No. switch  
(Factory setting: 0)  
2Connector for programmer  
4
Connector for shield  
switch for 10BASE-T  
ON  
S
H
I
E
L
D
2
1
4
0
5
6
9
7
4
3Connector for 10BASE-T  
OFF  
(Factory setting: ON)  
6Reset switch  
(Front)  
(Rear)  
Name  
Function  
Display panel  
Displays the JW-20FLT operating status using LEDs.  
LN  
TX  
RX  
12 V  
T
Lights when communicating normally.  
Blink at transmitting data.  
Blink at receiving data.  
Cannot be used with the JW-20FLT.  
Lights at test mode. (Normally, this is not used.)  
Lights at parameter setting error.  
Lights at this module error.  
1
PE  
HE  
Displays the station number when operating normally. Displays an error  
code if an error occurs.  
S0 to S7  
Connect a JW-14PG programmer or similar equipment to set the  
parameters on the JW-20FLT.  
Connector for programmer  
Connector for 10BASE-T  
2
3
Connect the 10BASE-T twisted pair.  
The shield on the twisted pair cable will be shorted to the FG (base) of  
this module.  
Connector for  
ON  
Shield switch  
4
for 10BASE-T  
OFF  
The shield on the twisted pair cable is not shorted to the base.  
Specify a module number from 0 to 6.  
- Be careful do not use the same number for another option module.  
Module No. switch  
5
6
Reset switch  
Only used by SHARP engineers. Users should not press this switch.  
4-2  
                                
Chapter 4: Name and Function of Each Part  
4-3 Z-336J  
9Switch SWA  
0Switch SW1  
Factory setting  
8Reset switch  
Factory setting  
: ON  
: ON  
S W 1  
S W A  
7Module No. switch SW4  
O N  
    S W A  
L N  
(Factory setting: 0)  
T X  
S W 1  
R X  
1 2 V  
T
P E  
H E  
S 7  
S 6  
S 5  
S 4  
S 3  
S 2  
S 1  
2Connector for programmer  
S 0  
1Display panel  
L N  
3Connector for 10BASE-T  
T X  
R X  
1 2 V  
T
4
P E  
H E  
S 7  
S 6  
S 5  
S 4  
S 3  
S 2  
S 1  
S 0  
4Connector for 10BASE5  
S W 6  
O N  
5Switch SW6  
612 VDC power supply input terminal  
S W 6  
1 2 V 0 V F G  
(Factory setting: ON)  
O N  
Name  
Function  
Display panel  
Displays this board operating status using LEDs.  
LN  
Lights when communicating normally.  
Blink at transmitting data.  
TX  
RX  
12 V  
T
Blink at receiving data.  
Lights when 12 VDC is supplied. (Only when 10BASE5 is used.)  
Lights at test mode. (Normally, this is not used.)  
Lights at parameter setting error.  
1
PE  
HE  
Lights at this board error.  
Displays the station number when operating normally. Displays an error  
code if an error occurs.  
S0 to S7  
Connect a JW-14PG programmer or similar equipment to set the  
parameters on this board.  
Connector for programmer  
Connector for 10BASE-T  
Connector for 10BASE5  
2
3
4
Connect the 10BASE-T coaxial cable.  
Connect the 10BASE5 coaxial cable.  
Make sure to slide the lock securely to the "lock" position.  
The shield on the cable between a 10BASE-T connector and a  
10BASE5 connector and the FG (base) on this module will be shorted  
together.  
ON  
Switch SW6  
OFF  
5
The shield on the cable between a 10BASE-T connector and a  
10BASE5 connector is not shorted to the base.  
- Ground the FG line on the 12 VDC connector separately.  
When 10BASE5 is used, connect a commercially available DC power  
supply that is designed to supply power to transceivers. The DC power  
supply must provide 12VDC ±5% and 0.5 A or more.  
12 VDC power supply  
input terminal  
6
Specify a module number from 0 to 6.  
- Be careful do not use the same number for another option board.  
Module No. switch  
Reset switch  
7
8
Only used by SHARP engineers. Users should not press this switch.  
Number of communication Specify the number of communication boards actually installed  
boards  
Switch SWA  
(including the Z-336J).  
- See pages 5-3 to 5-7.  
9
0
Switch SW1  
No need to set this switch for the Z-336J. (Always set to OFF (default).)  
4-3  
Chapter 4: Name and Function of Each Part  
4-4 JW-50FL  
JW-50FL  
LNK  
S0  
S1  
S2  
S3  
S4  
S5  
S6  
S7  
TX  
1LED indicator  
RX  
DC12V  
TEST  
PER  
HER  
2Connector for  
P
R
O
G
R
A
programmer  
8Switch SW3  
M
M
E
R
(Factory setting: 0)  
4
3Connector for  
10BASE5  
10B5  
7Switch SW3  
(Factory setting: ON)  
4Connector for  
10BASE-T  
10B-T  
512 VDC power  
OFF ON  
12VIN  
SW2  
supply input terminal  
(+)  
(-)  
FG  
RESET  
6Reset switch  
Name  
Function  
Display panel  
Displays the JW-50FL operating status using LEDs.  
LNK  
TX  
Lights at operating. Lights OFF at stopping.  
Blink at transmitting data.  
RX  
Blink at receiving data.  
12 VDC  
TEST  
Lights when 12 VDC is supplied. (Only when 10BASE5 is used.)  
Lights at test mode.  
1
2
PER  
Lights at parameter setting error.  
HER  
Lights at this module error.  
S0 to S7  
Indicates status of connection status monitor flag.  
When using a remote monitor or remote programming function, connect  
a JW-14PG programmer.  
Connector for programmer  
Connect the 10BASE5 transceiver cable.  
Make sure to slide the lock securely to the "lock" position.  
Connector for 10BASE5  
Connector for 10BASE-T  
3
4
Connect 10BASE-T twisted-pair cable.  
When 10BASE5 is used, connect a commercially available DC power  
supply that is designed to supply power to transceivers. The DC power  
supply must provide 12VDC 5% and 0.5 A or more.  
12 VDC power supply  
input terminal  
5
6
Reset switch  
ON  
Only used by SHARP engineers. Users should not press this switch.  
Turn ON when the shields on the 10BASE-T connectors or 10BASE5  
connectors are connected to the FG (base) of the JW-50FL.  
Switch SW2  
OFF  
7
Turn OFF when the shields on the 10BASE-T connectors or 10BASE5  
connectors are not connected to the FG.  
- Ground the FG line on the 12 VDC connector separately.  
Specify a parameter address (in system memory) from 0 to 4.  
- See page 12-4.  
Switch SW3  
8
Note: Only 10BASE5 or 10BASE-T protocol is used. Mixed use of these two types is not permitted.  
4-4  
Chapter 5: Installation  
5-1 Installation of JW-20FL5/20FLT  
This section describes the installation procedures for the JW-20FL5/20FLT (hereafter referred to as the  
module) on the JW20H/30H basic rack panel.  
Turn off the power to the JW20H/30H.  
Set the module No. switch on the back of the module.  
(Back of the communication module)  
5
Module No. switch  
Insert the mounting rib on the module into the rib insert holes on the JW20H/30H basic rack panel  
and push in. Then, tighten module-mounting screws at the top of the module using a Phillips-head  
(+) screwdriver.  
Intermediate plate  
or control panel  
Basic rack panel  
Module insert guide  
Ventilation hole  
(Installation example)  
Module mounting screw  
Basic rack panel  
Power supply module  
Module rib  
insert hole  
Module rib  
Phillips-head  
screwdriver  
The module  
This module  
(The figure shows a JW-20FL5.)  
Control module  
 JW-21CU/22CU, JW-31CUH1/32CUH1  
 JW-33CUH1/33CUH2/33CUH3  
Notes  
- The module cannot be installed into an expansion rack panel.  
- More than two communication modules can be installed on the same control module (basic rack panel  
for the JW20H/30H). However, be careful not to use the same module No. switch setting for any other  
module (including JW-20FL5/20FLT).  
- Make sure to tighten the module mounting screws securely. Loose screws may cause a malfunction.  
5-1  
Chapter 5: Installation  
5-2 Installation of Z-336J  
Board dimensions and assembled dimensions of the Z-336J are shown below.  
Board dimensions  
5
100  
5
[Unit: mm]  
Boss hole: 4-φ4  
The dimensions on the left do not include metal fittings.  
170  
180  
5
5
110  
Assembled dimensions  
[Unit: mm]  
* CPU board (when Z-311J/312J is mounted)  
25.0  
21.6  
D2  
D
When installing the Z-336J under the CPU board.  
D2  
D2  
15.0  
In the case metal fixing A is used.  
* The CPU board can only be installed at the upper most position.  
- For details about assembly/installation dimensions, see the manuals below.  
J-board Z-311J/312J User's Manual: Hardware Version.  
J-board Z-313J User's Manual: Hardware Version.  
J-board Z-511J User's Manual: Hardware Version.  
Dimensions D and D2 correspond to D and D2 "board sizes" of the manuals above.  
- Make sure to ensure there is conductivity between the installation metal and installation section.  
5-2  
                                
Chapter 5: Installation  
This paragraph describes the maximum number of Z-336J boards to install on the J-board and allocation of I/O  
relays.  
Allocation of I/O relays  
When mounted on the Z-311J/312J  
When mounted on the Z-313J  
When mounted on the Z-511J  
See the next page.  
See page 5-5.  
See page 5-6.  
[1] Maximum number of boards to mount  
The Z-336J is a kind of communication board of the J-board. Maximum number of boards mounted on  
the J-board shall be the total number of communication boards mounted.  
Total number of boards able to be mounted including  
Z-336J and other communication boards  
J-board  
CPU board  
Z-311J  
Maximum 2  
- When the total current flow at 5 V of each mounted  
board exceeds 800 mA, the number of boards shall be  
limited.  
Z-300 series  
Z-500 series  
5
Z-312J  
Z-313J * Maximum 1  
Z-511J * Maximum 2  
Types of communication boards  
Module name  
Specifications  
Z-331J *  
Z-332J  
Z-333J  
Z-334J *  
Z-335J  
Z-336J  
Z-337J  
Data link or computer link, satellite I/O link master station  
Data link or computer link  
Satellite I/O link master station  
ME-NET board (with branch line extension function)  
Satellite net board  
FL-net board  
DeviceNet board  
* Manufactured on request.  
5-3  
Chapter 5: Installation  
[2] Address allocation of I/O relay  
This section describes I/O relay addresses allocated to the Z-336J.  
(1) When mounted on Z-311J/312J  
The total number of Z-336J boards able to be mounted including other communication boards is two  
at maximum. Below the switch settings of the Z-336J and allocation of I/O relay are shown.  
When using one communication board (Z-336J)  
Set switch SWA for number of communication boards on the Z-336J as follows.  
Setting of  
ON  
ON  
switch SWA  
on the Z-336J  
Address to set  
R = 0, S = 0  
I/O relay address  
0000  
0001  
0002  
0003  
0004  
0005  
0006  
0007  
Z-336J  
* Though it is allocated as optional,  
it will be a dummy area not  
functionally used.  
(optional)*  
Dummy  
(vacant)  
R = 0, S = 1  
R = 0, S = 2  
R = 0, S = 3  
5
Dummy  
(vacant)  
Dummy  
(vacant)  
When using two communication boards  
Depending on at which position the Z-336J is used, the allocation of I/O relay varies.  
Use Z-336J as first unit  
Use Z-336J as 2nd unit  
Setting of  
switch SWA  
on the Z-336J  
ON  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
Address to set  
R = 0, S = 0  
Address to set  
R = 0, S = 4  
I/O relay address  
I/O relay address  
0000  
0001  
0002  
0003  
0004  
0005  
0006  
0007  
0010  
0011  
0012  
0013  
0014  
0015  
0016  
0017  
Z-336J  
(optional)*  
Dummy  
(vacant)  
R = 0, S = 1  
R = 0, S = 2  
R = 0, S = 3  
R = 0, S = 5  
R = 0, S = 6  
R = 0, S = 7  
Dummy  
(vacant)  
Dummy  
(vacant)  
Examples of allocation  
Below the switch setting and I/O allocation when using two Z-336J is shown.  
Mounted  
position  
SW1  
SWA  
I/O relay  
address  
Address to set  
(RACK NO) (SW2)  
Z-336J  
Z-336J  
Z-322J  
Z-322J  
Z-311J  
/312J  
0020, 0021 R=1, S=0  
0022, 0023 R=1, S=1  
0024, 0025 R=1, S=2  
0026, 0027 R=1, S=3  
0030, 0031 R=2, S=0  
0032, 0033 R=2, S=1  
0034, 0035 R=2, S=2  
0036, 0037 R=2, S=3  
0000, 0001 R=0, S=0  
0002, 0003 R=0, S=1  
0004, 0005 R=0, S=2  
0006, 0007 R=0, S=3  
0010, 0011 R=0, S=4  
0012, 0013 R=0, S=5  
0014, 0015 R=0, S=6  
0016, 0017 R=0, S=7  
SW2  
1 2  
1 2 3  
1
2
3
4
4
3
SW2  
1 2  
2
1 2 3  
1
SWA  
1 2  
1 2 3  
1 2 3  
5-4  
SWA  
1 2  
ON  
OFF  
                                
Chapter 5: Installation  
(2) When mounted on Z-313J  
The number of boards available mounted on the Z-336J including other communication boards is  
one at maximum.  
Below shows the switch setting of the Z-313J and Z-336J as well as I/O relay allocation of the Z-  
336J.  
Switch setting  
The set switch SWA on the Z-313J and the number of communication boards setting switch SWA of  
the Z-336J are as shown below.  
- Z-313J  
- Z-336J  
Switch SWA  
Switch SWA  
1    
ON  
2
ON  
1    
OFF  
2
ON  
Allocation of I/O relay  
I/O relay address of the Z-336J shall be allocated as shown below.  
Allocation  
5
I/O relay address  
Address to set  
R = 0, S = 4  
R = 0, S = 5  
R = 0, S = 6  
R = 0, S = 7  
details  
0010  
0011  
0012  
0013  
0014  
0015  
0016  
0017  
Z-336J  
(optional)*  
* Though it is allocated as optional,  
it will be a dummy area not  
functionally used.  
Dummy  
(vacant)  
Dummy  
(vacant)  
Dummy  
(vacant)  
Allocation examples  
Below shows switch setting and I/O relay allocation when using one Z-336J.  
Mounted  
position  
I/O relay  
address  
SW1  
SWA  
Address to set  
Z-336J  
Z-325J  
Z-325J  
Z-313J  
(RACK NO.SW2)  
0000, 0001  
0002, 0003  
0004, 0005  
0006, 0007  
0020, 0021  
0022, 0023  
0024, 0025  
0026, 0027  
0030, 0031  
0032, 0033  
0034, 0035  
0036, 0037  
0040, 0041  
0042, 0043  
0010, 0011  
0012, 0013  
0014, 0015  
0016, 0017  
R=0, S=0  
R=0, S=1  
R=0, S=2  
R=0, S=3  
R=1, S=0  
R=1, S=0  
R=1, S=1  
R=1, S=2  
R=1, S=3  
R=2, S=0  
R=2, S=0  
R=2, S=1  
R=2, S=2  
R=2, S=3  
R=0, S=4  
R=0, S=5  
R=0, S=6  
R=0, S=7  
SWA  
1 2  
NO  
4
1
2
3
4
3
2
SW2  
1 2  
1
1 2 3  
SW2  
1 2  
1 2 3  
ON  
OFF  
SWA  
1 2  
1 2 3  
5-5  
Chapter 5: Installation  
(3) When mounted on Z-511J  
The number of boards available mounted on the Z-336J including other communication boards is  
two at maximum.  
Below shows the switch setting of the Z-511J and Z-336J as well as I/O relay allocation of the Z-  
336J.  
When using one communication board (Z-336J)  
Switch setting  
The set switches SW1 and SWA on the Z-511J and the number of communication boards setting  
switch SWA on the Z-336J are as follows.  
- Z-336J  
- Z-511J  
Switch SW1  
1   2    3  
Switch SWA  
Switch SWA  
1    
2
1    
2
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
Allocation of I/O relay  
I/O relay address of the Z-336J shall be allocated as shown below.  
5
Allocation  
I/O relay address  
Address to set  
R = 0, S = 4  
R = 0, S = 5  
R = 0, S = 6  
R = 0, S = 7  
details  
0010  
0011  
0012  
0013  
0014  
0015  
0016  
0017  
Z-336J  
(optional)*  
* Though it is allocated as optional,  
it will be a dummy area not  
functionally used.  
Dummy  
(vacant)  
Dummy  
(vacant)  
Dummy  
(vacant)  
Allocation examples  
Below shows switch setting and I/O relay allocation when using one Z-336J.  
Mounted  
position  
SW1  
SWA  
I/O relay  
address  
Address to set  
(RACK NO) (SW2)  
Z-336J  
Z-322J  
Z-322J  
Z-511J  
0000, 0001 R=0, S=0  
0002, 0003 R=0, S=1  
0004, 0005 R=0, S=2  
0006, 0007 R=0, S=3  
0020, 0021 R=1, S=0  
0022, 0023 R=1, S=1  
0024, 0025 R=1, S=2  
0026, 0027 R=1, S=3  
0030, 0031 R=2, S=0  
0032, 0033 R=2, S=1  
0034, 0035 R=2, S=2  
0036, 0037 R=2, S=3  
0010, 0011 R=0, S=4  
0012, 0013 R=0, S=5  
0014, 0015 R=0, S=6  
0016, 0017 R=0, S=7  
SWA  
1 2  
1 2 3  
1
2
3
4
4
3
SW2  
1 2  
2
1 2 3  
1
SW2  
1 2  
1 2 3  
SW2  
1 2  
1 2 3  
ON  
OFF  
5-6  
                                
Chapter 5: Installation  
When using two communication boards (Z-336J)  
Switch setting  
The set switches SW1 and SWA on the Z-551J and the number of communication boards setting  
switch SWA on the Z-336J are as follows.  
- Z-336J  
- Z-511J  
Use Z-336J  
as 1st unit  
Switch SWA  
Use Z-336J  
as 2nd unit  
Switch SWA  
Switch SW1  
1   2    3  
Switch SWA  
1    
2
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
1    
2
1    
2
ON  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
Allocation of I/O relay  
I/O relay address of the Z-336J shall be allocated as shown below.  
Use Z-336J as 1st unit  
Use Z-336J as 2nd unit  
I/O relay address  
Allocation  
details  
I/O relay address  
0000  
Address to set  
Address to set  
0010  
0011  
0012  
0013  
0014  
0015  
0016  
0017  
Z-336J  
(optional)*  
R = 0, S = 4  
R = 0, S = 5  
R = 0, S = 6  
R = 0, S = 7  
R = 0, S = 0  
5
0001  
0002  
Dummy  
(vacant)  
R = 0, S = 1  
R = 0, S = 2  
R = 0, S = 3  
0003  
0004  
Dummy  
(vacant)  
0005  
0006  
Dummy  
(vacant)  
0007  
* Though it is allocated as optional, it will be a dummy area not functionally used.  
Allocation examples  
Below shows switch setting and I/O relay allocation when using two Z-336Js.  
Mounted  
position  
SW1  
SWA  
I/O relay  
address  
Address to set  
(RACK NO) (SW2)  
Z-336J  
Z-336J  
Z-322J  
Z-511J  
0020, 0021 R=1, S=0  
0022, 0023 R=1, S=1  
0024, 0025 R=1, S=2  
0026, 0027 R=1, S=3  
0030, 0031 R=2, S=0  
0032, 0033 R=2, S=1  
0034, 0035 R=2, S=2  
0036, 0037 R=2, S=3  
0000, 0001 R=0, S=0  
0002, 0003 R=0, S=1  
0004, 0005 R=0, S=2  
0006, 0007 R=0, S=3  
0010, 0011 R=0, S=4  
0012, 0013 R=0, S=5  
0014, 0015 R=0, S=6  
0016, 0017 R=0, S=7  
SWA  
1 2  
1 2 3  
1
2
3
4
4
3
SWA  
1 2  
2
1 2 3  
1
SWA  
1 2  
1 2 3  
SWA  
1 2  
1 2 3  
ON  
OFF  
5-7  
Chapter 5: Installation  
5-3 JW-50FL  
(1) Installation of cable for option module  
Install the optional cable on the basic rack panel that installed JW-50FL.  
Cable type for option module  
Maximum number of JW-50FL  
Cable for option module  
that can be installed  
ZW-2CC  
ZW-4CC  
ZW-6CC  
2
4
5
Note *  
* If the ZW-6CC is used, a maximum of 6 optional modules can be installed. However, a limit of  
5 optional modules can be used with JW-50FL, due to a parameter (address area) setting limita-  
tion.  
5
Rack panel type  
Cable for option module  
Model name of the rack  
(
: Can be installed  
: Cannot be installed)  
panel on which optional  
cable is installed  
ZW-2CC  
ZW-4CC  
ZW-6CC  
JW-4BU  
JW-6BU  
JW-8BU  
JW-13BU  
(2) Installation of JW-50FL  
Attach the rack panel using the two attachment screws.  
Before installation or removal, make sure to shut OFF the power supply to the PC.  
Install on rack panel JW-4BU  
Module  
Rack panel  
Appearance when ZW-2CC optional  
cable is installed  
- This module can be installed in any one of the optional slots.  
Be careful not to bend the connector pins on the module by applying  
too much force to them.  
Phillips screwdriver  
5-8  
Chapter 6: Connection/Wiring  
6-1 Installing an Ethernet cable  
Workers who will install or hook up an Ethernet cable must have special training and knowledge, such as  
the safety procedures and standards required by this technology (JIS X5252).  
We recommend that you contact a specialist for perform any installation or hook up. (Sharp Document  
Systems Co., Ltd. is providing the Ethernet installation work service, and supplying network products  
from Allied System Co., Ltd.)  
[1] Equipment layout  
- The minimum distance between nodes is specified in the regulations. (2.5 m when the 10BASE5 is  
used.) When connecting devices, be sure to maintain these minimum distances.  
Cables used for 10BASE5 systems have marks every 2.5 m. Position each transceiver directly on one  
of these marks.  
- Mount the transceivers on electrically insulated objects, such as a wooden mounting block.  
[2] Wiring  
6
- Separate (60 cm or more) the data transmission cables from power cables.  
- Do not run cables near any noise generating source.  
- Both ends of the coaxial cable must be terminated with a termination resistance. Make sure to install  
termination resistance on each end.  
6-1  
Chapter 6: Connection/Wiring  
6-2 Connection  
[1] Connection of JW-20FL5  
This paragraph describes how to connect 10BASE5 cable to the JW-20FL5.  
(1) Connecting the transceiver cable  
1Slide the lock on the 10BASE5 connector (on the JW-20FL5) up.  
Slide lock  
JW-20FL5  
R
E
S
E
T
6
2Insert the connector so that the two locking posts on the cable connector match the holes on  
the slide lock.  
Locking post  
RESET  
Locking post  
Transceiver cable  
3Slide the lock down to lock the cable connector.  
RESET  
6-2  
Chapter 6: Connection/Wiring  
(2) Wiring the power source  
When a 10BASE5 is used, 12 VDC power should be supplied to the transceiver.  
Supply power to the 12 VDC power supply input terminal using a commercial constant voltage power  
supply unit.  
-
JW 20FL5  
Item  
Specifications  
12 VDC 5%  
Supply voltage  
Current capacity  
LN TX RX 12V  
T PE HE  
S7 S6 S5 S4 S3 S2 S1 S0  
0.5 A minimum.  
12 VDC power supply input terminal  
Black wire (-)  
ON  
S
H
I
* Fuse (0.6 A)  
E
L
D
OFF  
Red wire (+)  
6
Twisted pair wires  
(+)  
12 VDC  
FG  
(-)  
RESET  
* Use a fuse melt with time lag  
Case  
Green wire  
(ground)  
Cable  
(Accessory: Connector, cable length 1.5 m)  
Remarks  
- Use a power supply that is dedicated for use by the JW-20FL5.  
- Do not reverse the positive and negative connections to the power terminals. Reversing the polarity  
may damage the JW-20FL5.  
6-3  
Chapter 6: Connection/Wiring  
[2] When connecting to a JW-20FLT  
Connect a 10BASE-T twisted pair cable to the 10BASE-T connector on the JW-20FLT.  
10BASE-T twisted  
pair cable  
10BASE-T connector  
6
6-4  
Chapter 6: Connection/Wiring  
[3] Connection of Z-336J  
(1) When connecting to a 10BASE5  
This paragraph describes how to connect 10BASE5 cable to the Z-336J.  
Connecting the transceiver cable  
O N  
    S W A  
L N  
T X  
S W 1  
R X  
1 2 V  
T
Slide lock  
P E  
H E  
S 7  
S 6  
S 5  
S 4  
S 3  
S 2  
S 1  
10BASE5 connector  
1
↑↓  
S 0  
 3  
Z-336J  
Cable connector  
2
S W 6  
O N  
6
Transceiver cable  
Locking post  
1Slide the lock on the 10BASE5 connector (on the Z-336J) up.  
2Insert the connector so that the two locking posts on the cable connector match the holes on  
the slide lock.  
3Slide the lock down to lock the cable connector.  
6-5  
Chapter 6: Connection/Wiring  
Wiring the power source  
When a 10BASE5 is used, 12 VDC power should be supplied to the transceiver.  
Supply power to the 12 VDC power supply input terminal of the Z-336J using a commercial constant  
voltage power supply unit.  
O N  
    S W A  
L N  
Item  
Specifications  
12 VDC 5%  
T X  
S W 1  
R X  
1 2 V  
T
P E  
H E  
S 7  
S 6  
S 5  
S 4  
S 3  
S 2  
S 1  
Supply voltage  
Current capacity  
0.5 A minimum.  
S 0  
Z-336J  
12 VDC power supply input terminal  
S W 6  
O N  
6
Twisted pair wires  
Red wire (+)  
Green wire  
(ground)  
Cable  
(Accessory: Connector,  
cable length 1.5 m)  
Black wire (-)  
Case  
* Fuse (0.6 A)  
* Use a fuse that will melt with  
time lag  
(+)(-)  
12 VDC  
Remarks  
- Use a power supply that is dedicated for use by the Z-336J.  
- Do not reverse the positive and negative connections to the power terminals. Reversing the polarity  
may damage the Z-336J.  
6-6  
Chapter 6: Connection/Wiring  
(2) When connecting to a 10BASE-T  
Connect a 10BASE-T twisted pair cable to the 10BASE-T connector on the Z-336J.  
O N  
    S W A  
L N  
T X  
S W 1  
R X  
1 2 V  
T
P E  
H E  
S 7  
S 6  
S 5  
S 4  
S 3  
S 2  
S 1  
10BASE-T connector  
S 0  
10BASE-T twisted pair cable  
Z-336J  
S W 6  
O N  
6
6-7  
Chapter 6: Connection/Wiring  
[4] Connection of JW-50FL  
(1) Connection of 10BASE5  
This paragraph describes how to connect 10BASE5 cable to the JW-50FL.  
Connecting the transceiver cable  
Slide lock  
Locking post  
↑ ↓  
  ③  
10BASE5 connector  
Locking post  
Transceiver cable  
6
1Slide the lock on the 10BASE5 connector (on the JW-50FL) up.  
2Insert the connector so that the two locking posts on the cable connector match the holes on  
the slide lock.  
3Slide the lock down to lock the cable connector.  
Wiring the power source  
When a 10BASE5 is used, 12 VDC power should be supplied to the transceiver.  
Supply power to the 12 VDC power terminals using a commercial constant voltage power supply  
unit.  
Item  
Specifications  
12 VDC 5%  
Supply voltage  
Current capacity  
10B5  
0.5 A minimum.  
Black wire (-)  
* Fuse (0.6 A)  
10B-T  
Red wire (+)  
12VIN  
Twisted pair wires  
(+)  
(+)  
(-)  
FG  
12 VDC  
(-)  
RESET  
* Use a fuse melt with time lag  
Case  
Green wire  
(ground)  
Cable  
(Accessory: Connector, cable length 1.5 m)  
Remarks  
- Use a power supply that is dedicated for use by the JW-50FL.  
- Do not reverse the positive and negative connections to the power terminals. Reversing the  
polarity may damage the JW-50FL.  
6-8  
Chapter 6: Connection/Wiring  
(2) When connecting to a 10BASE-T  
Connect a 10BASE-T twisted pair cable to the 10BASE-T connector on the JW-50FL.  
10BASE-T twisted  
pair cable  
10BASE-T connector  
6
6-9  
Chapter 7: Use Guide  
7-1 Ethernet  
[1] 10BASE5 system  
The basic configuration of a10BASE5 system consists of one coaxial cable, with a maximum length of  
500 m, and nodes connected to this cable as shown below. Each node is connected to the coaxial cable  
using a transceiver and a transceiver cable (AUI cable). Two types of transceivers are available: Single  
port transceivers to connect a single transceiver cable (AUI cable), and multi-port transceivers to con-  
nect more than one cable.  
This basic configuration unit is referred to as "segment." A maximum of 100 nodes can exist in one  
segment.  
Max. 500 m  
Segment  
7
: Coaxial cable  
: Node  
: Transceiver cable (AUI cable)  
: Singe port transceiver  
: Multi-port transceiver  
: Terminator  
Basic connection method for a 10BASE5 system (maximum 500 m without a repeater)  
7-1  
Chapter 7: Computer Link Function  
If the distance between nodes is greater than 500 m, connect a repeater as shown below, or to increase  
the number of segments by branching. The figure below is an example of a system with a maximum of  
1500 m of cable. Arrange the configuration so that there are never more than two repeaters between  
any two nodes along any path.  
7
Basic connections in a 10BASE5 system (maximum 1500 m using repeaters)  
CAUTION  
Connect the repeater to the coaxial cable through a transceiver and transceiver cable. Repeaters  
can be connected to any transceiver in the same segment. The installation distance between  
transceivers is considered to be a multiple of "2.5m" lengths. That is, any cable length should be  
evenly divisible by 2.5 m and not have a remainder.  
7-2  
Chapter 7: Computer Link Function  
The example shown below allows up to 2,500m between nodes. In order to extend communication  
distance, link cables are used (with repeaters at both ends). The maximum length of one link is 500  
m. These cables are referred to as "link segments."  
The link segments must not connect nodes directly. However, the areas surrounded by dotted lines,  
including repeaters at both ends, are treated as a single repeater. This does away with the limitation  
on the total number of repeaters between nodes in a system.  
Link segment 1  
Link segment 2  
Segment B  
: Area inside this  
rectangle is treated  
as one repeater  
7
Segment D  
Basic connections in a 10BASE5 system (maximum 2500 m using repeaters)  
CAUTION  
Each link segment must be 500 m or less.  
Do not connect a node to the link segment.  
A link segment is treated as one repeater, even though it includes a repeater at each end (enclosed  
with dotted lines).  
No more than two repeaters shall exist along the path between any two nodes.  
Only one segment in the network can be connected to more than two repeaters.  
7-3  
Chapter 7: Computer Link Function  
Parameters related to the system configuration are summed up below.  
General specifications for configuring an Ethernet system  
Item  
Specifications  
Maximum length of a segment  
500 m  
Maximum number of transceivers that can be  
installed within one segment  
100  
Maximum distance between nodes  
2500 m or less (except for the transceiver cables)  
254  
Maximum number of nodes in a system  
Maximum length of transceiver cable (AUI cable) 50 m  
Cable length between transceiver and repeater 2 m or less (recommended)  
Maximum number of repeaters between two  
nodes  
2 (However, a link segment is treated as one  
repeater, even though it has a repeater at each end.)  
[2] 10BASE-T system  
Connect a hub to a transceiver using a transceiver cable, and the hub can be connected to multiple  
nodes. This system is shown below.  
When you want to connect a node to a hub, use twisted pair cable (10BASE-T).  
7
: Twisted pair cable  
(10BASE-T)  
Basic connections in a 10BASE-T system  
If distance between the nodes is not too great, you can connect a twisted pair cable to a hub directly,  
without using a coaxial cable or transceiver.  
7-4  
Chapter 7: Computer Link Function  
[3] IP addresses on an Ethernet  
In general, the UDP/IP uses a 32-bit logical address called the "IP address."  
The IP address consists of a network address and a host address. Normally, a class C configuration is  
used in the FA industry.  
Host address  
(8 bits)  
Network address  
(20 bits)  
Class C  
1
1
0
X
IP address classifications on an Ethernet  
Each 8 bits of the address are separated by a period and can be expressed as a decimal number. For  
example, class C IP addresses are expressed as follows.  
11000000  
192  
00000010  
001.  
00000000  
000.  
00000011  
003.  
Network address  
Host number  
Note: The default address in the FL-net address scheme is 192.168.250.N (N: Node numbers 1 to 254).  
7
An example of an IP address on a class C Ethernet  
7-5  
Chapter 7: Computer Link Function  
7-2 FL-net  
[1] Description of the FL-net  
(1) The FL-net concept  
FL-net is an FA control network that uses an Ethernet protocol.  
FL-net has a cyclic transfer function and a message transfer function.  
The basic concepts of the FL-net are as follows.  
1Ethernet protocols are used for communication (physically and as conceptual data links)  
between FA controllers.  
2 A UDP/IP scheme compatible with the Ethernet is used. It establishes the basic data transfer  
procedures.  
3 While using the basic data transfer methods above, FL-net guarantees data transfer within a  
specified time by managing and controlling (preventing conflicts) the access to communications  
by each node in the network.  
The goal of the FL-net is to control devices such as programmable controllers (PC), robot controllers  
(RC), numeric control devices (CNC), and establish an FA control network that allows the exchange of  
data between personal computers.  
The figure below shows the conceptual arrangement of the FL-net.  
7
Personal  
computer  
Personal  
computer  
Personal  
computer  
Server  
EWS  
Information network (Ethernet)  
FL-net  
Gateway  
PC  
Image  
Nut  
runner  
Robot  
controller  
Printer  
Graphic  
panel  
NC  
BCR  
Personal ID  
computer  
Field network  
Sensor  
actuator  
Note: BCR; Bar Code Reader, ID: ID controller  
The FL-net concept  
7-6  
Chapter 7: Computer Link Function  
(2) FL-net protocol  
The FL-net consists of the following 6 protocol layers.  
Application layer  
Controller interface  
Service function  
Message transfer  
Token function  
Cyclic transfer  
FA link protocol layer  
FL-net  
protocol  
Transport layer  
Network layer  
UDP  
IP  
Data link layer  
Physical layer  
Ethernet  
(Compatible with IEEE802.3)  
FA link protocol  
Note: The transport layer and network layer use the UDP/IP addressing scheme. The data link layer  
and physical layer use the Ethernet scheme.  
(3) Features of the FL-net transfer system  
7
The FL-net data transfer system has the following features.  
1It manages the transmission of data using the Master-less Token method, and prevents commu-  
nication conflicts.  
2It is possible to specify a certain refresh cycle interval as the FL-net circulates a Token.  
3The specified Token is transmitted together with the cyclic data.  
4When starting up, the FL-net sends a token from the node with the lowest node number.  
5When a token is not received within a certain interval, the next node sends a token.  
6By using the Master-less Token method, even if some nodes are faulty the network will not stop  
operating.  
7The FL-net has an information management table for items such as the operation mode (RUN/  
STOP) / hardware error (ALARM), so that it can inform other nodes of the operation status.  
7-7  
Chapter 7: Computer Link Function  
(4) FL-net's IP address scheme  
Each node in the FL-net should be set independently using class C addresses. An "IP address" is an  
address used to identify a specific node (station) when sending data and using an Internet Protocol  
(IP). Therefore a unique IP address should be assigned to each node or device. The FL-net uses  
class C IP addresses.  
The default value of an FL-net IP address is "192.168.250.***", where "***" is the node number.  
Host number  
(node number)  
Network address  
FL-net IP  
address  
192.168.250  
n (n: 1 to 254)  
FL-net IP address  
[2] The number of modules and their node numbers  
Up to 254 nodes can be connected. The FL-net uses node numbers from 1 to 254.  
1Node Nos. 1 to 249: For normal equipment in the FL-net.  
2Node Nos. 250 to 254: For maintenance of the FL-net.  
3Node No. 255: Used internally by the FL-net. The user cannot assign this number. (It is used to  
transfer broadcast of the global address.)  
7
4Node No. 0: Used internally by the FL-net. The user cannot assign this number.  
Network  
address  
Node nbr.  
Node number 1 to 249:  
Can be used by users.  
Node number 250 to 254:  
For maintenance  
The number of nodes and node numbers on the FL-net.  
7-8  
Chapter 7: Computer Link Function  
[3] Data communication type  
FL-net data communication supports both "cyclic transfer" and "message transfer."  
Message  
Cyclic data  
with Token  
data  
Cyclic transfer  
Cyclic transfer + Message transfer  
Type of data communication on the FL-net  
(1) Cyclic transfer  
With cyclic transfer, the JW-50FL sends data at certain intervals. Each node can share data through  
a common (shared) memory.  
Token  
Data  
7
Node  
3
Node  
...  
Node  
Node  
0
Node  
1
2
Node 1  
Node 2  
Node 3  
Node 4  
Node 1  
Node 2  
Node 3  
Node 4  
Node 1  
Node 2  
Node 3  
Node 4  
Node 1  
Node 2  
Node 3  
Node 4  
Node 1  
Node 2  
Node 3  
Node 4  
Common  
memory  
Node n  
Node n  
Node n  
Node n  
Node n  
Example of a common memory and cyclic transfer  
7-9  
Chapter 7: Computer Link Function  
(2) Message transfer  
In the message transfer operation, the JW-50FL sends data non-cyclically.  
Normally, when a request to send occurs, the FL-net will communicate with a certain node.  
Transfer message from node 1 to 3  
Transfer message from node 6 to 4  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Example of a message transfer  
[4] Transfer data volume  
(1) Cyclic transfer  
In a cyclic transfer, the FL-net has an 8 K bits + 8 K words = 8.5 K word transfer area.  
The maximum amount of data that can be transferred cyclically at one time by one node is 8.5 K  
7
words.  
One word = 2 bytes.  
215  
20  
8 K bit  
Area 1  
Area 2  
Common  
memory area  
8 K word  
Cyclic transfer data limit  
7-10  
Chapter 7: Computer Link Function  
(2) Message transfer  
The maximum amount of data that can be transferred in one message frame is 1024 bytes (exclud-  
ing the header section).  
Message frame  
1024 byes  
Message transfer data limit  
[5] Transfer cycle  
In the cyclic transfer operation, the JW-50FL refreshes the common memory almost constantly. The  
JW-50FL controls the transfer of messages so that the refresh interval of the common memory does not  
exceed the allowable refresh cycle interval for a single message transfer.  
Each node always monitors the messages being transferred throughout the network, waiting to receive  
a token addressed to itself. If no message transferred by the network within this cycle, the refresh cycle  
interval is increased to 120 % of its current value.  
Due to the monitoring process above, the refresh cycle interval is automatically determined by the  
number of nodes active on the network.  
7
7-11  
Chapter 7: Computer Link Function  
[6] Data area and memory  
FL-net communication module  
CPU module  
Cyclic transfer  
Common memory area 1  
Common memory area 2  
Message transfer  
buffer area  
FL-net management table area  
FL-net parameter area  
Physical memory  
7
Data area and memory  
7-12  
Chapter 7: Computer Link Function  
[7] Communication management table  
The status of each node is controlled using an individual node management table (maintained by the  
node itself), a participating node management table, and a network management table.  
(1) Local node management table  
The settings in each local node management table are controlled by the node itself.  
Local node management table  
Number  
Item  
Description  
of bytes  
Node number  
1 byte 1 to 254  
Area 1 of common memory: Data top  
address  
2 bytes Word address (0 to 0x1ff)  
2 bytes Size (0 to 0x1ff)  
Area 1 of common memory: Data size  
Area 2 of common memory: Data top  
address  
2 bytes Word address (0 to 0x1fff)  
Area 2 of common memory: Data size  
Upper layer status  
2 bytes Size (0 to 0x1fff)  
2 bytes RUN/STOP/ALARM/WARNING/NORMAL  
1 byte In units of 1 msec.  
Token monitor time  
7
Minimum separation of frames  
Vendor name  
1 byte In units of 100 µsec.  
10 bytes Vender name  
Manufacturer name  
Node name (facility name)  
Protocol version  
10 bytes Manufacture model name, device name  
10 bytes Node name by user entry  
1 byte Fixed to 0x80  
FA link status  
1 byte Participate/leave  
Local node's status  
1 byte Doubled node number detection, etc.  
- "0x1ff" is the hexadecimal notation for 1FF(HEX).  
For details about the local node management table maintained by the JW-50FL, see page  
10-5.  
7-13  
Chapter 7: Computer Link Function  
(2) Participating node management table  
The participating node management table contains data related to the nodes currently participating  
in the network.  
Participating node management table  
Number  
Item  
Description  
of bytes  
Node number  
1 byte 1 to 254  
Upper layer status  
2 bytes RUN/STOP/ALARM/WARNING/NORMAL  
2 bytes Word address (0 to 0x1ff)  
2 bytes Size (0 to 0x1ff)  
Area 1 of common memory: Data top  
address  
Area 1 of common memory: Data size  
Area 2 of common memory: Data top  
address  
2 bytes Word address (0 to 0x1fff)  
Area 2 of common memory: Data size  
Allowable refresh cycle time  
Token monitor time  
2 bytes Size (0 to 0x1fff)  
2 bytes In units of 1 msec.  
1 byte In units of 1 msec.  
1 byte In units of 100 µsec.  
1 byte Participate/leave  
Minimum separation of frames  
Link status  
7
- "0x1ff" is the hexadecimal notation for 1FF(HEX).  
- For details about the participation node management table maintained by the JW-50FL, see  
page 10-6.  
(3) Network management table  
The network management table contains information common to the network.  
Network management table  
Number  
Item  
Description  
of bytes  
Token latch node number  
1 byte Currently token staying node.  
1 byte In units of 100 µsec.  
2 bytes In units of 1 msec.  
2 bytes In units of 1 msec.  
2 bytes In units of 1 msec.  
2 bytes In units of 1 msec.  
Minimum separation of frames  
Allowable refresh cycle time  
Measured refresh cycle time (current value)  
Measured refresh cycle time (maximum value)  
Measured refresh cycle time (minimum value)  
- For details about the network management table maintained by the JW-50FL, see page 10-6.  
7-14  
Chapter 7: Computer Link Function  
[8] Cyclic transfer and data area  
(1) Outline of the cyclic transfer process  
The cyclic transfer process is a function that supports cyclic data exchanges that occur between  
nodes.  
1Establishes the common memory function.  
2Transmits when a node receives the token.  
3Nodes which do not execute cyclic transfers within the network are allowed to participate.  
4When received the token, the node sends all the cyclic data that it needs to send.  
- Token: Generally, only one token exists in a network. If more than one token exists in a  
network, the token with the lowest destination node number has priority and any other token  
is discarded.  
- Token frame: A frame with a token has a destination node number and a transmitting node  
number. The node whose number matches the destination node number holding the token.  
- Token order: The token rotation order is determined by the node numbers. The token is  
passed to the nodes in order that the nodes were registered in the participating node man-  
agement table. The node with the highest node number hands the token over to the node  
with the lowest node number.  
7
Node #1 Node #2 Node #3  
Token  
Node #N  
Time  
Node #1  
Node #2  
Node #3  
Node #N  
Token  
Token rotation and cyclic transfer 1  
Node #N  
Node #1  
Time  
Node #2  
Node #N-1  
Token  
Node #N  
Node #N-1  
Node #2  
Node #1  
Token  
Token rotation and cyclic transfer 2  
7-15  
Chapter 7: Computer Link Function  
(2) Common memory  
The description of the common memory is as follows.  
1The common memory allows the memory to be shared between nodes performing a cyclic  
transfer.  
2Two types of areas (area 1 and area 2) are allocated for each node.  
3If an area needed by a node to send its data exceeds the transfer size allowed for one frame,  
namely, more than 1024 bytes, the node should use multiple frames to send the data.  
4When receiving multiple frames of related data, as described in point 3) above, the common  
memory does not renew the common memory details until it has received all of the frames  
being sent by one node. In other words, it guarantees simultaneity of each node.  
(However, if the data in area 2 exceeds 3084 bytes, the JW-50FL cannot guarantee  
simultaneity for hardware reasons.)  
58 K bits + 8 K words = 8.5 K words (fixed) of common memory must be reserved in the node  
communication section.  
6The size of areas 1 and 2, used as the sending area for one node in the common memory, can  
be specified as any size within the maximum size allowed for the area.  
7Since each node broadcasts data with a certain interval, it provides a function for sharing the  
same data throughout the system. Each node in an FL-net is assigned a sending area that  
does not overlap with the others for exchanging data. In common memory operations, the  
sending area for one node will be the receiving area for another node.  
7
Node 01  
common memory  
Node 02  
(Receive)  
(Send)  
Node 03  
(Receive)  
(Receive)  
Node 04  
(Receive)  
(Receive)  
(Send)  
(Receive)  
(Receive)  
(Receive)  
(Receive)  
(Receive)  
(Receive)  
(Send)  
(Send)  
(Receive)  
Example 1: Common memory during a cyclic transfer  
7-16  
Chapter 7: Computer Link Function  
The common memory can also be used exclusively as a receiving area.  
Node 01  
common memory  
Node 02  
Node 05  
(Send)  
(Receive)  
(Receive)  
(Receive)  
(Send)  
(Receive)  
Example 2: Common memory during a cyclic transfer  
(3) Area 1 and area 2  
7
One node can be allocated two data areas (area 1 and area 2) for common memory. To determine  
the sending area, specify a top address and the size of the area.  
To access the area, use word addresses. Area 1 consists of 0.5 K word. Area 2 consists of 8 K words.  
Area 1  
Area 2  
Top address  
Top address  
Size  
Size  
Common memory areas 1 and 2  
7-17  
Chapter 7: Computer Link Function  
(4) Guarantee of simultaneity  
The cyclic transfer divides data into frames, depending on the amount of data being sent.  
The FL-net guarantees the simultaneity on common memory of each node using the following proce-  
dures.  
Note: When area 2 exceeds 3084 bytes, the JW-50FL cannot guarantee the simultaneity  
of the data for hardware reasons.  
1Data transmission timing  
When a node receives a request to send data from the upper layer, it copies its own cyclic data  
into a buffer and sends the data, one word after another. When the amount of data being sent is  
more than will fit in one frame, it divides the data in the buffer into multiple frames before  
sending.  
2Refresh timing when receiving  
After a node has received all the cyclic data from some other node, it will refresh the correspond-  
ing area while synchronizing with the upper layer.  
When a cyclic data is sent as multiple frames, the receiving node will refresh the area after receiv-  
ing all the frames from the other node. If any of the frames is missing, it will delete all the data from  
that node.  
7
Sending  
Common memory  
area  
Data sending side  
Group copy  
Data sending buffer  
Cyclic data  
Cyclic data  
On network  
circuit  
Cyclic data  
Data receiving buffer  
Data receiving side  
Group copy  
Data receive  
Common memory  
area  
Guarantee of simultaneity of data  
7-18  
Chapter 7: Computer Link Function  
[9] Message transfers  
(1) Outline of the message transfer process  
The message transfer process is a function that allows asynchronous data to be exchanged be-  
tween nodes.  
The basic operation of the message transfer process is shown below.  
1When a node receives a token, it will send a maximum of one frame of message data before  
the cyclic frame data sending.  
2A maximum of 1024 bytes can be sent at one time.  
3The JW-50FL uses an algorithm to prevent nodes from exceeding the allowable refresh cycle  
interval for message transfers.  
4The JW-50FL has a "1:1" message transfer mode for sending to a specified node, and "1:N"  
message transfer mode to send to all nodes.  
5It has a data send confirmation function used to check whether a target node has correctly  
received the data in a "1:1" message transfer.  
Request  
7
Response  
Node 1  
Node 2  
Node 3  
Node 4  
"1:1" data transfer  
Request  
Receive  
Receive  
Receive  
Node 1  
Node 2  
Node 3  
Node 4  
"1:N" data transfer  
Outline of the message transfer process  
7-19  
Chapter 7: Computer Link Function  
(2) Table of support messages  
Table of support messages  
No.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
q
w
Message  
Request Response Pages to refer  
Read byte-block data  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
7-21  
7-22  
7-23  
7-24  
7-25  
7-26  
7-27  
7-28  
7-29  
7-29  
7-30  
7-30  
Write byte-block data  
Read word-block data  
Write word-block data  
Read network parameters  
Write network parameters  
Start, stop commands  
Read profile  
Read log data  
Clear log data  
Return message  
7
Transfer transmission message  
7-20  
Chapter 7: Computer Link Function  
(3) Details of the support messages  
1Read byte-block data  
This is a message function used to read a virtual address space (32-bit address space) in a  
target node on the network, in units of one byte at a time (each address = 8-bits). Be careful  
because the internal address map varies with the FL-net module you are using.  
Request message  
Response message  
8 bits  
0
AA  
7
0xffffffff  
AA  
Virtual address space  
Physical memory  
7-21  
Chapter 7: Computer Link Function  
2Write byte-block data  
This is a message function used to write to a virtual address space (32-bit address space) in a target  
node on the network, in units of one byte at a time (each address = 8-bits). Be careful because the  
internal address map varies with the FL-net module you are using.  
Request message  
Response message  
8 bits  
0
AA  
0xffffffff  
AA  
7
Virtual address space  
Physical memory  
7-22  
Chapter 7: Computer Link Function  
3Read word-block data  
This is a message function used to read a virtual address space (32-bit address space) in a target  
node on the network in units of one word at a time (one address = 16-bits). Be careful because the  
internal address map varies with the FL-net module you are using.  
Request message  
Response message  
16 bits  
0
AAAA  
0xffffffff  
AAAA  
Virtual address space  
7
Physical memory  
7-23  
Chapter 7: Computer Link Function  
4Write word-block data  
This is a message function used to write to a virtual address space (32-bit address space) in a target  
node on the network in units of one word at a time (one address = 16-bits). Be careful because the  
internal address map varies with the FL-net module you are using.  
Request message  
Response message  
16 bits  
0
AAAA  
0xffffffff  
AAAA  
Virtual address space  
7
Physical memory  
7-24  
Chapter 7: Computer Link Function  
5 Read network parameters  
This is a function used to read the network parameter data for a target node through the network.  
It reads the following data.  
Network parameter data  
- Node number  
- Vender name  
- Manufacturer model name  
- Node name (facility name)  
- Address and size of common memory  
- Token monitor interval  
- Refresh cycle allowable interval  
- Refresh cycle measuring interval (actually measured value)  
- Minimum allowable distance between frames  
- Upper layer status  
- FL-net status  
- Protocol version  
7
Request message  
Response message  
Node number  
Vender name  
Manufacturer model name  
Node name (facility name)  
Top address of area 1  
Size of area 1  
Top address of area 2  
Size of area 2  
Token monitor time out time  
Minimum allowable distance of frames  
FL-net status  
Protocol version  
Upper layer status  
Refresh cycle allowable interval RCT set value  
Refresh cycle measured value (current value)  
Refresh cycle measured value (maximum value)  
Refresh cycle measured value (minimum value)  
Network parameter  
7-25  
Chapter 7: Computer Link Function  
6Write network parameters  
This is a function used to change the network parameter data of a receiving node through the  
network.  
The following data can be changed.  
- Node name (facility name)  
- Address and size of common memory  
When the address and size of the common memory is changed, the receiving node leaves the  
network and re-enters it again. If only the node name is changed, the receiving node will not  
leave the network.  
Request message  
Response message  
Node number  
Vender name  
Manufacturer model name  
Node name (facility name)  
Top address of area 1  
7
Size of area 1  
Top address of area 2  
Size of area 2  
Token monitor time out time  
Minimum allowable distance of frames  
FL-net status  
Protocol version  
Upper layer status  
Refresh cycle allowable interval RTC set value  
Refresh cycle measured value (current value)  
Refresh cycle measured value (maximum value)  
Refresh cycle measured value (minimum value)  
Network parameter  
7-26  
Chapter 7: Computer Link Function  
7Start, stop commands  
This is a function used to remotely start and stop the operation of equipment that is connected to the  
FL-net.  
Request message  
Response message  
Operation  
Operation instruction  
Request message  
Response message  
Stop  
7
Stop instruction  
7-27  
Chapter 7: Computer Link Function  
8Read profile  
This is a function used to remotely set the system parameters of a device profile that is the data for  
the receiving node. The following parameters are included in the system parameters.  
- Common parameters (essential)  
- Parameters peculiar to each device (optional)  
Request message  
Response message  
Common parameters  
7
Parameters special  
to a device  
System parameter  
7-28  
Chapter 7: Computer Link Function  
9Read log data  
This is a function used to read the log data of the receiving node.  
Request message  
Response message  
Communication log data  
7
0Clear log data  
This is a function used to clear log data of the receiving node.  
Request message  
Response message  
Clear  
Communication log data  
7-29  
Chapter 7: Computer Link Function  
qReturn message  
This is a function used to send back a message that has been received.  
The FL-net automatically returns messages.  
Request message  
Response message  
wTransfer transmission message  
This is a function used to provide a transmission service to the FL-net upper layer.  
This function informs received message to the FL-net upper layer.  
The FL-net upper layer supplies this message to the user interface without modification. The user  
interface has to create a response and returns against this notice.  
Some equipment provides a special service for the transmission message. For details, check the  
services on each device.  
7
Request message  
Response message  
Create  
response  
message  
FL-net  
upper layer  
User interface  
7-30  
Chapter 8: Cyclic Transfer  
To execute a cyclic transfer using the FL-net module (JW-20FL5/20FLT and JW-50FL) and FL-net  
board (Z-336J), the parameters in the common memory areas (area 1 and 2) must be set.  
Token  
Data  
Own  
node  
(node f)  
Node  
n
Node  
1
1
Node 1  
Node f  
Node 1  
Node f  
Node 1  
Node f  
2
3
Area 1  
Node n  
Node 1  
Node n  
Node 1  
Node n  
Node 1  
4
Common  
memory  
area  
5
6
Node f  
Node n  
Node f  
Node n  
Node f  
Area 2  
8
Node n  
f = 1 to n (n:1 to 249)  
Capacity  
Area 1 8K bits (8192 bits = 1024 bytes)  
Common  
memory area  
8.5K words  
Area 2 8K words (8192 words = 16384 bytes)  
- Nodes used to execute a cyclic transfer must have 8.5 K words of memory available for the  
common memory area.  
- Areas that can be allocated as the common memory area  
Page 8-4 to 8-6.  
- Notes on the common memory areas  
Next page.  
Parameter items to set  
Set item  
Reference number  
of the figure above  
Parameter  
address(8)  
Top address and file number on a PC  
20 to 22  
10 to 11  
12 to 13  
24 to 26  
14 to 15  
16 to 17  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Area 1 Top address of sending area (this node)  
Sending data length (this node)  
Top address and file number on a PC  
Area 2  
Top address of sending area (this node)  
Sending data length (this node)  
- Set the parameters for use by the module in controlling any module (CPU board) installed in  
this module.  
See "Chapter 12: Parameters."  
8-1  
Chapter 8: Cyclic Transfer  
Notes on the common memory areas  
The common memory areas (area 1 and 2) can also be set using the following procedures.  
1. There is no need to allocate sequential node numbers.  
[Example]  
Node  
2
Node  
4
Node  
7
Node 2  
Node 4  
Node 7  
Node 2  
Node 4  
Node 7  
Node 2  
Node 4  
Node 7  
Area 1  
2. There is no need to assign data memory areas in node number order.  
[Example]  
Node  
1
Node  
2
Node  
3
Node  
4
Node 1  
Node 4  
Node 3  
Node 2  
Node 1  
Node 4  
Node 3  
Node 2  
Node 1  
Node 4  
Node 3  
Node 2  
Node 1  
Node 4  
Node 3  
Node 2  
Area 1  
8
3. There is no need for continuous data memory areas.  
[Example]  
Node  
1
Node  
2
Node  
3
Node 1  
Node 2  
Node 3  
Node 1  
Node 2  
Node 3  
Node 1  
Node 2  
Node 3  
Area 1  
8-2  
Chapter 8: Cyclic Transfer  
8-1 Setting procedures  
This section describes all of the FL-net module setting procedures. For details about message transfers,  
the communication management area, and the SEND/RECEIVE function, see the respective chapters.  
1 Specify a parameter area  
See Chapter 12.  
A parameter area is allocated within the control module.  
- When the JW20H, JW30H, or J-board is used for a PC, set the parameter area in accordance  
with the set value of the module No. switch.  
- When the JW50H/70H/100H is used for host PC, set switch SW3 on the JW-50FL.  
2Enter basic data  
Enter basic data (node number, token monitor interval, and minimum separation of frames) in the  
parameter area (addresses 00 to 05(8)).  
3Settings related to cyclic transfers  
1) Enter the top address for the common memory areas (area 1 and 2)  
- The data memory area (see pages 8-4 to 8-6) in which a common memory area can be  
assigned in the PC varies with the model of the module installed in the PC.  
- Enter the top addresses for area 1 and area 2 at parameter addresses 20 to 26(8) as word  
addresses (see pages 8-7 to 8-12).  
2) Enter the send area address for this node  
- Enter the send area parameters for this node (top address and data length) for areas 1 and  
2 at addresses 10 to 17(8). Enter a word address (page 8-7 to 8-12) for the top address.  
8
4Settings related to message transfers  
See Chapter 9 (page 9-2).  
When you will not be using the client function in the messages that are sent, this setting is not  
required.  
1) Set the buffer area for transmitted messages  
Enter the top address of the transmission buffer, and this area (address +0000 to 4055(8):  
2094 bytes) will also be set. Enter the top address at parameter addresses 34 to 36(8).  
2) Enable use of the transmission buffer  
Enable/disable the use of this buffer for each message. Use parameter address 37(8).  
5Assign the communication management area  
See Chapter 10 (page 10-1).  
Enter the top address of the communication management area, and the areas (address +000 to  
301(8): 194 bytes) will also be set. Enter the top address at parameter addresses 20 to 26(8).  
6Enter the node name  
Enter the node name at parameter addresses 40 to 51(8), if required.  
7Enter a SEND/RECEIVE instruction time-out time  
See Chapter 11.  
When using the SEND/RECEIVE function, enter a time-out time (0.1 to 25.5 seconds) at param  
eter address 60(8). If you will not be using the SEND/RECEIVE function, this setting is not re-  
quired.  
8Set the start switch  
Change the value at parameter address 77(8) from 00(H) to 01(H), and transfer the parameter  
setting details from the control module (CPU board) to the FL-net module, to start communication.  
8-3  
Chapter 8: Cyclic Transfer  
8-2 Areas that can be allocated as the common memory area  
The data memory area that can be allocated as the common memory areas (area 1 and 2) vary with the  
model of the module used.  
FL-net module  
Host PC  
Control module  
JW-21CU/22CU  
JW-31CUH1  
Details  
JW20H  
See below  
JW-20FL5  
JW-20FLT  
JW30H  
JW-32CUH1  
Next page  
JW-33CUH1/2/3  
FL-net board  
Host J-board  
Z-300 series  
Z-500 series  
CPU board  
Z-311J/312J/313J  
Z-511J  
Details  
See below  
Next page  
Z-336J  
FL-net module  
Host PC  
Memory module  
---  
Details  
JW50H  
JW-1MAH  
JW-2MAH  
JW-3MAH  
JW-4MAH  
JW-50FL  
Page 8-6  
JW70H  
JW100H  
(1) For the JW20H or J-board (Z-300 series)  
Address of the data memory that can be allocated to common memory  
8
Bit address(8)  
Byte address(8)  
File address(8)  
Relay  
00000 to 15777  
000000 to 001577  
001600 to 001777  
0000 to 1577  
1600 to 1777  
b0000 to b1777  
TMR/CNT contact point  
T-C000 to T-0777  
TMR/CNT/MD current value  
---  
002000 to 003777  
09000 to 09777  
19000 to 19777  
29000 to 29777  
39000 to 39777  
49000 to 49777  
59000 to 59777  
69000 to 69777  
79000 to 79777  
89000 to 89777  
99000 to 99777  
004000 to 004777  
005000 to 005777  
006000 to 006777  
007000 to 007777  
010000 to 010777  
011000 to 011777  
012000 to 012777  
013000 to 013777  
014000 to 014777  
015000 to 015777  
Register  
---  
Self diagnosis result  
storage register  
---  
E0000 to E1777  
See page 8-8.  
016000 to 017777  
- The top address parameter is a word based address.  
8-4  
Chapter 8: Cyclic Transfer  
(2) For the JW30H or J-board (Z-500 series)  
Address of the data memory that can be allocated to  
common memory  
Bit address(8)  
Byte address(8)  
File address(8)  
Relay  
00000 to 15777  
000000 to 001577  
001600 to 001777  
0000 to 1577  
TMR/CNT contact point  
T-C0000 to T-C0777  
1600 to 1777  
TMR/CNT/MD current value  
---  
b0000 to b1777 002000 to 003777  
09000 to 09777 004000 to 004777  
19000 to 19777 005000 to 005777  
29000 to 29777 006000 to 006777  
39000 to 39777 007000 to 007777  
49000 to 49777 010000 to 010777  
59000 to 59777 011000 to 011777  
69000 to 69777 012000 to 012777  
79000 to 79777 013000 to 013777  
89000 to 89777 014000 to 014777  
99000 to 99777 015000 to 015777  
E0000 to E5777 016000 to 023777  
Register  
---  
File 0  
Register  
(Possible to register error history)  
---  
E6000 to E7777 024000 to 025777  
TMR/CNT current value  
---  
b2000 to b3777 026000 to 027777  
8
Expansion relay  
20000 to 75777  
030000 to 035577  
035600 to 035777  
000000 to 037777  
000000 to 177777  
000000 to 177777  
000000 to 177777  
to  
2000 to 7577  
TMR/CNT contact point  
T-C1000 to T-C1777  
7600 to 7777  
File 1  
File 2  
---  
---  
---  
---  
to  
---  
---  
---  
---  
to  
File 3  
File 10(H)  
to  
File 14(H)  
to  
---  
to  
---  
to  
000000 to 177777  
to  
File 2C(H)  
---  
---  
000000 to 177777  
- The relationship between the control module (on which the memory module is installed) and the file  
memory is as follows.  
Control module  
File memory  
JW-31CUH1  
File 0  
File 0, 1, and 2  
JW-32CUH1 *  
(File 2 can be allocated to 000000 to 177777 or 000000 to 077777)  
JW-33CUH1  
JW-33CUH2  
JW-33CUH3  
File 0, 1 to 3  
File 0, 1 to 3 and 10 to 14(H)  
File 0, 1 to 3 and 10 to 2C(H)  
* File memory of J-board (Z-500 series) is the same as that of JW-32CUH1.  
- The top address parameter is a word based address. See page 8-9.  
8-5  
Chapter 8: Cyclic Transfer  
(3) For the JW50H/70H/100H  
Address of the data memory that can be allocated to  
common memory  
Bit address(8)  
Byte address(8)  
File address(8)  
Relay  
00000 to 15777  
T-C0000 to 0777  
T-C1000 to 1777  
000000 to 001577  
001600 to 001777  
001300 to 001477 *  
0000 to 1577  
1600 to 1777  
1300 to 1477*  
b0000 to b1777  
TMR/CNT contact point  
TMR/CNT/MD current value  
---  
002000 to 003777  
09000 to 09777  
19000 to 19777  
29000 to 29777  
39000 to 39777  
49000 to 49777  
59000 to 59777  
69000 to 69777  
79000 to 79777  
89000 to 89777  
99000 to 99777  
E0000 to E0777  
E1000 to E1777  
---  
004000 to 004777  
005000 to 005777  
006000 to 006777  
007000 to 007777  
010000 to 010777  
011000 to 011777  
012000 to 012777  
013000 to 013777  
014000 to 014777  
015000 to 015777  
016000 to 016777  
017000 to 017777  
000000 to 177777  
000000 to 177777  
000000 to 177777  
to  
File 0  
Register  
---  
8
File 1  
File 2  
File 3  
to  
---  
---  
---  
to  
---  
---  
to  
File 7  
---  
---  
000000 to 177777  
* 1300 to 1477 (file addresses 001300 to 001477) are for shared use with the general-purpose  
relays. Therefore, if a timer/counter is set up with 1024 points, these file addresses cannot be used  
for the general-purpose relays.  
- The relationship between the PC model (on which the memory module is installed) and the file  
memory is as follows.  
Integrated memory  
PC model  
File memory  
module  
JW50H  
---  
File 0, 1 (000000 to 037777)  
File 0, 1 (000000 to 037777)  
File 0, 1 (000000 to 177777)  
JW-1MAH  
JW-2MAH  
JW70H  
JW100H  
JW-3MAH  
JW-4MAH  
File 0, 1, 2  
File 1 to 7  
- The top address parameter is a word based address.  
See page 8-11.  
8-6  
Chapter 8: Cyclic Transfer  
8-3 Parameter settings for cyclic transfers  
The parameters related to cyclic transfers are as follows.  
Parameter  
Description  
address(8)  
10  
Top address (word address) of the data sending areas of own node area 1 *  
- Address 10 is for the lower digit and 11 is for the upper digit.  
2
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
20  
21  
22  
24  
25  
26  
Sending data length (word) of own node area 1  
- Address 12 is for the lower digit and 13 is for the upper digit.  
3
5
6
Top address (word address) of the data sending areas of own node area 1 *  
- Address 14 is for the lower digit and 15 is for the upper digit.  
Sending data length (word) of own node area 1  
- Address 16 is for the lower digit and 17 is for the upper digit.  
Top address (word address) of area 1 on a PC *  
- Address 20 is for the lower digit and 21 is for the upper digit.  
1
4
File number of area 1 on the PC.  
Top address (word address) of area 2 on a PC *  
- Address 24 is for the lower digit and 25 is for the upper digit.  
File number of area 2 on the PC.  
8
Corresponds to 1to 6on page 8-1.  
- Enter the top address in word units (* above).  
(For parameter details  
See Chapter 12.)  
Pages 8-8 to 8-12.  
Ex.: Enter 1600 to 1601 (word address 01C0(H)) as the top address at parameter addresses 10  
and 11(8).  
Parameter address  
Set value (HEX)  
(Upper digit) 11  
01  
(Lower digit) 10  
C0  
8-7  
Chapter 8: Cyclic Transfer  
[1] Word addresses used for the top address  
The top address entered in the parameters for cyclic transfers on the FL-net are word addresses.  
Variations among the PLC models that can be installed are shown below.  
(1) For the JW20H or J-board (Z-300 series)  
JW20H/J-board (Z-300series) address Top address set in FL-net cyclic transfer  
Byte address(8)  
0000, 0001  
0002, 0003  
to  
File address(8)  
000000, 000001  
000002, 000003  
to  
Word unit: Octal  
000000  
000001  
to  
Word unit: Hex.  
0000  
0001  
to  
Relay  
001576, 001577  
001600, 001601  
001602, 001603  
to  
000677  
000700  
000701  
to  
01BF  
01C0  
01C1  
to  
1576, 1577  
1600, 1601  
1602, 1603  
to  
TMR/CNT contact point  
TMR/CNT/MD current value  
001776, 001777  
002000, 002001  
002002, 002003  
000777  
001000  
001001  
01FF  
0200  
0201  
1776, 1777  
b0000, b0001  
b0002, b0003  
to  
to  
to  
to  
b1776, b1777  
09000, 09001  
09002, 09003  
003776, 003777  
004000, 004001  
004002, 004003  
001777  
002000  
002001  
03FF  
0400  
0401  
to  
to  
to  
to  
09776, 09777  
19000, 19001  
to  
004776, 004777  
005000, 005001  
to  
002377  
002400  
to  
04FF  
0500  
to  
8
19776, 19777  
29000, 29001  
to  
005776, 005777  
006000, 006001  
to  
002777  
003000  
to  
05FF  
0600  
to  
29776, 29777  
39000, 39001  
to  
006776, 006777  
007000, 007001  
to  
003377  
003400  
to  
06FF  
0700  
to  
39776, 39777  
49000, 49001  
to  
007776, 007777  
010000, 010001  
to  
003777  
004000  
to  
07FF  
0800  
to  
Register  
49776, 49777  
59000, 59001  
to  
010776, 010777  
011000, 011001  
to  
004377  
004400  
to  
08FF  
0900  
to  
59776, 59777  
69000, 69001  
to  
011776, 011777  
012000, 012001  
to  
004777  
005000  
to  
09FF  
0A00  
to  
69776, 69777  
79000, 79001  
to  
012776, 012777  
013000, 013001  
to  
005377  
005400  
to  
0AFF  
0B00  
to  
79776, 79777  
89000, 89001  
to  
013776, 013777  
014000, 014001  
to  
005777  
006000  
to  
0BFF  
0C00  
to  
89776, 89777  
99000, 99001  
to  
014776, 014777  
015000, 015001  
to  
006377  
006400  
to  
0CFF  
0D00  
to  
99776, 99777  
E0000, E0001  
to  
015776, 015777  
016000, 016001  
to  
006777  
007000  
to  
0DFF  
0E00  
to  
Self diagnosis result  
storage register  
E1776, E1777  
017776, 017777  
007777  
0FFF  
8-8  
Chapter 8: Cyclic Transfer  
(2) For the JW30H or J-board (Z-500 series)  
JW30H/J-board (Z-500 series)  
address  
Top address set in FL-net cyclic  
transfer  
Byte address(8) File address(8) Word unit: Octal Word unit: Hex.  
000000, 000001  
000002, 000003  
to  
000000  
000001  
to  
0000  
0001  
to  
0000, 0001  
0002, 0003  
to  
Relay  
001576, 001577  
001600, 001601  
001602, 001603  
to  
000677  
000700  
000701  
to  
01BF  
01C0  
01C1  
to  
1576, 1577  
1600, 1601  
1602, 1603  
to  
TMR/CNT contact point  
TMR/CNT/MD current value  
001776, 001777  
000777  
001000  
001001  
01FF  
0200  
0201  
1776, 1777  
b0000, b0001 002000, 002001  
b0002, b0003 002002, 002003  
to  
to  
to  
to  
b1776, b1777 003776, 003777  
09000, 09001 004000, 004001  
09002, 09003 004002, 004003  
001777  
002000  
002001  
03FF  
0400  
0401  
to  
to  
to  
to  
09776, 09777 004776, 004777  
19000, 19001 005000, 005001  
002377  
002400  
to  
04FF  
0500  
to  
to  
to  
19776, 19777 005776, 005777  
29000, 29001 006000, 006001  
002777  
003000  
to  
05FF  
0600  
to  
8
to  
to  
29776, 29777 006776, 006777  
39000, 39001 007000, 007001  
003377  
003400  
to  
06FF  
0700  
to  
to  
to  
39776, 39777 007776, 007777  
49000, 49001 010000, 010001  
003777  
004000  
to  
07FF  
0800  
to  
to  
to  
49776, 49777 010776, 010777  
59000, 59001 011000, 011001  
004377  
004400  
to  
08FF  
0900  
to  
Register  
to  
to  
59776, 59777 011776, 011777  
69000, 69001 012000, 012001  
004777  
005000  
to  
09FF  
0A00  
to  
to  
to  
69776, 69777 012776, 012777  
79000, 79001 013000, 013001  
005377  
005400  
to  
0AFF  
0B00  
to  
to  
to  
79776, 79777 013776, 013777  
89000, 89001 014000, 014001  
005777  
006000  
to  
0BFF  
0C00  
to  
to  
to  
89776, 89777 014776, 014777  
99000, 99001 015000, 015001  
006377  
006400  
to  
0CFF  
0D00  
to  
to  
to  
99776, 99777 015776, 015777  
E0000, E0001 016000, 016001  
006777  
007000  
to  
0DFF  
0E00  
to  
to  
to  
E5776, E5777 023776, 023777  
011777  
13FF  
Continued on the next page  
8-9  
Chapter 8: Cyclic Transfer  
From the previous page  
JW30H/J-board (Z-500 series)  
address  
Top address set in FL-net cyclic  
transfer  
Byte address(8) File address(8) Word unit: Octal Word unit: Hex.  
E6000, E6001 024000, 024001  
to to  
012000  
to  
1400  
to  
Register  
(Possible to register  
error history)  
E7776, E7777 025776, 025777  
b2000, b2001 026000, 026001  
012777  
013000  
to  
15FF  
1600  
to  
to  
to  
TMR/CNT/MD current value  
Expansion relay  
b3776, b3777 027776, 027777  
013777  
014000  
to  
17FF  
1800  
to  
File 0  
030000, 030001  
to  
2000, 2001  
to  
035576, 035577  
035600, 035601  
016677  
016700  
1DBF  
1DC0  
7576, 7577  
7600, 7601  
to  
TMR/CNT contact point  
to  
to  
to  
1DFF  
0000  
to  
035776, 035777  
000000, 000001  
to  
016777  
000000  
to  
7776, 7777  
File 1  
File 2  
File 3  
---  
---  
---  
037776, 037777  
000000, 000001  
to  
017777  
000000  
to  
1FFF  
0000  
to  
8
177776, 177777  
000000, 000001  
to  
077777  
000000  
to  
7FFF  
0000  
to  
177776, 177777  
000000, 000001  
to  
077777  
000000  
to  
7FFF  
0000  
to  
File 10(H)  
to  
---  
to  
177776, 177777  
to  
077777  
to  
7FFF  
to  
000000, 000001  
to  
000000  
to  
0000  
to  
File 14(H)  
to  
---  
to  
177776, 177777  
to  
077777  
to  
7FFF  
to  
000000, 000001  
to  
000000  
to  
0000  
to  
File 2C(H)  
---  
177776, 177777  
077777  
7FFF  
- The relationship between the control module (on which the memory module is installed) and file  
memory is as follows.  
Control module  
File memory  
JW-31CUH1  
File 0  
File 0, 1, and 2  
JW-32CUH1 *  
(File 2 can be allocated to 000000 to 177777 or 000000 to 077777)  
JW-33CUH1  
JW-33CUH2  
JW-33CUH3  
File 0, 1 to 3  
File 0, 1 to 3 and 10 to 14(H)  
File 0, 1 to 3 and 10 to 2C(H)  
* File memory of J-board (Z-500 series) is the same as that of JW-32CUH1.  
8-10  
Chapter 8: Cyclic Transfer  
(3) For the JW50H/70H/100H  
JW30H/J-board (Z-500 series)  
address  
Top address set in FL-net cyclic  
transfer  
Byte address(8) File address(8) Word unit: Octal Word unit: Hex.  
000000, 000001  
000002, 000003  
to  
000000  
000001  
to  
0000  
0001  
to  
0000, 0001  
0002, 0003  
to  
Relay  
001576, 001577  
001600, 001601  
001602, 001603  
to  
000677  
000700  
000701  
to  
01BF  
01C0  
01C1  
to  
1576, 1577  
1600, 1601  
1602, 1603  
to  
TMR/CNT contact point *  
TMR/CNT/MD current value  
001776, 001777  
000777  
001000  
001001  
01FF  
0200  
0201  
1776, 1777  
b0000, b0001 002000, 002001  
b0002, b0003 002002, 002003  
to  
to  
to  
to  
b1776, b1777 003776, 003777  
09000, 09001 004000, 004001  
09002, 09003 004002, 004003  
001777  
002000  
002001  
03FF  
0400  
0401  
to  
to  
to  
to  
09776, 09777 004776, 004777  
19000, 19001 005000, 005001  
002377  
002400  
to  
04FF  
0500  
to  
to  
to  
19776, 19777 005776, 005777  
29000, 29001 006000, 006001  
002777  
003000  
to  
05FF  
0600  
to  
8
to  
to  
29776, 29777 006776, 006777  
39000, 39001 007000, 007001  
003377  
003400  
to  
06FF  
0700  
to  
to  
to  
39776, 39777 007776, 007777  
49000, 49001 010000, 010001  
003777  
004000  
to  
07FF  
0800  
to  
to  
to  
49776, 49777 010776, 010777  
59000, 59001 011000, 011001  
004377  
004400  
to  
08FF  
0900  
to  
Register  
to  
to  
59776, 59777 011776, 011777  
69000, 69001 012000, 012001  
004777  
005000  
to  
09FF  
0A00  
to  
to  
to  
69776, 69777 012776, 012777  
79000, 79001 013000, 013001  
005377  
005400  
to  
0AFF  
0B00  
to  
to  
to  
79776, 79777 013776, 013777  
89000, 89001 014000, 014001  
005777  
006000  
to  
0BFF  
0C00  
to  
to  
to  
89776, 89777 014776, 014777  
99000, 99001 015000, 015001  
006377  
006400  
to  
0CFF  
0D00  
to  
to  
to  
99776, 99777 015776, 015777  
E0000, E0001 016000, 016001  
006777  
007000  
to  
0DFF  
0E00  
to  
to  
to  
E1776, E1777 017776, 017777  
007777  
0FFF  
* To address T-C1000 to 1777, which are TMR/CNT contact points,  
use 1300 to 1477 (file addresses 001300 to 001477) in the gen-  
eral-purpose relays.  
Continued on the next page  
8-11  
Chapter 8: Cyclic Transfer  
From the previous page  
JW50H/70H/100H address  
Top address set in FL-net cyclic transfer  
Byte address(8)  
File address(8)  
000000, 000001  
to  
Word unit: Octal  
Word unit: Hex.  
000000  
to  
0000  
to  
File 1  
File 2  
037776, 037777  
to  
017777  
to  
1FFF  
to  
177776, 177777  
000000, 000001  
to  
077777  
000000  
to  
7FFF  
0000  
to  
177776, 177777  
000000, 000001  
to  
077777  
000000  
to  
7FFF  
0000  
to  
File 3  
to  
177776, 177777  
077777  
7FFF  
to  
to  
to  
to  
000000, 000001  
to  
000000  
to  
0000  
to  
File 7  
8
177776, 177777  
077777  
7FFF  
- The relationship between the PC model, the memory module that is installed, and file memory is as  
follows.  
PC model  
Integrated memory module  
File memory  
File 0, 1 (000000 to 037777)  
File 0, 1 (000000 to 037777)  
File 0, 1 (000000 to 177777)  
File 0, 1, 2  
JW50H  
---  
JW-1MAH  
JW-2MAH  
JW-3MAH  
JW-4MAH  
JW70H  
JW100H  
File 1 to 7  
8-12  
Chapter 8: Cyclic Transfer  
8-4 Communication time  
[1] Token round time  
The token round time can be obtained as follows.  
Node N1  
Tn  
Node N  
Spacing between data  
of this node and the  
previous node  
m
Token round time = Tn  
n=1  
(Total of the space (time) between data from this node and all previous nodes.)  
"Tn" varies with the amount of data sent by the previous station. It also varies with the processing timing  
of the JW-50FL. To get the token round time, perform a calculation based on the rough numbers shown  
below.  
Cyclic transfer capacity per station (word)  
Communication time  
per station (ms)  
Area 1  
1
Area 2  
1
1.2 to 1.7  
1.3 to 1.7  
1.5 to 1.9  
1.7 to 2.3  
2.2 to 3.0  
3.0 to 4.2  
3.6 to 4.3  
4.2 to 6.1  
5.0 to 6.7  
5.1 to 8.1  
6.5 to 9.0  
6.8 to 10.1  
8.0 to 10.6  
8.6 to 13.3  
13.9 to 18.4  
2
2
8
4
64  
8
128  
256  
464  
512  
960  
1024  
1440  
1536  
1920  
2048  
2560  
4096  
16  
32  
32  
64  
64  
96  
96  
128  
128  
160  
256  
- The values above are for the JW-50FL. For other nodes, see each manual.  
When message transfers are used, the communication time will be longer. However, the FL-net re-  
stricts the token round time when using message transfers to 1.2 times that of a message transfer.  
[2] Round time when a communication error occurs  
If a station goes down, the node immediately after the dead node will issue a token. This time depends  
on the token monitor time of the dead node. Therefore, if one station goes down, its cycle will result in a  
longer token monitor time than the dead node would have used. If two consecutive nodes go down  
simultaneously, the next node will issue a token. In this case the time required to issue a new token will  
be the total of the token monitor time of both dead nodes. If more than two consecutive nodes go down,  
a similar calculation will apply.  
8-13  
Chapter 9: Message Transfers  
The message transfer method used with the module classifies messages as "client function," "transmission  
type message," or "remote function" (SHARP's proprietary function). These classifications can be assigned  
by setting each type to "Used" or "Not used," as shown below.  
*1  
*2  
Client function  
Transmission  
message  
Remote function (SHARP’s  
proprietary function)  
81(H)  
83(H)  
81(H)  
Use  
Do not use  
Use  
Use  
Message transfer  
of the module  
Do not use  
Use  
80(H)  
82(H)  
00(H)  
Use  
Do not use  
Do not use  
Do not use  
Selection of  
transmission buffer  
Message  
*3  
80(H) 81(H) 82(H) 83(H)  
Message other than transmission  
×
×
Messages other than SHARP's proprietary  
message format  
Transmission  
message  
Computer link function  
SHARP's  
×
×
proprietary format  
Remote function  
O: Usable X: Not usable  
*1: The client function is used to send a message to a target node and receive a response from that  
node. When not sending a transmission message, set the client function to "Not used."  
*2: The remote function includes the remote programming and remote monitoring functions.  
9
*3: 00, and 80 to 83(H) are values used for the parameter address 37(8).  
See Chapter 12.  
To execute a message transfer using the FL-net, the following settings are required on the control module  
(CPU board) of the PC on which the FL-net is installed.  
1Create a transmission buffer area for the parameters and select it for use.  
2Place the message to send in the transmission buffer.  
3Execute a send command in the communication control area.  
Send data (request)  
Receive data (response)  
FL-net  
This node  
(Host PC  
for the  
Node  
used to  
exchange  
data  
module)  
Inside the control module (CPU board) of the PC  
Communication  
control area  
Transmission buffer  
Address(8)  
Address(8)  
Parameter  
*1  
*2  
0000  
000  
Received data  
(data section)  
30 Set up the communication  
control area  
33  
Set up a transmission  
buffer  
34  
1777  
37  
2000  
Execute a send  
data command  
Transmitted data  
(data section)  
301  
Start switch  
77  
*2: Enter the top address at  
Enter the details for  
the messages to be  
sent  
3777  
4000  
- Parameters => See Chapter 12  
parameter addresses 30 to 32.  
Received data  
(information section)  
4015  
4040  
Transmitted data  
(information section)  
*1: Enter the top address at  
parameter addresses 34 to 36.  
4050  
9-1  
Chapter 9: Message transfers  
9-1 Message sending procedures and data reception details  
This section describes procedures used for the settings needed to send (or request) messages using  
the message transfer function, as well as the details for receiving data from a node. (JW-50FL general  
setting procedures  
See page 8-3.)  
Send data (request)  
Receive data (response)  
FL-net  
This node  
(Host PC  
for the JW-  
50FL  
Node  
used to  
exchange  
data  
1Setting the parameters  
Specify the transmission buffer area that will be used to send (request) and receive (response)  
messages.  
1) Specify the area for the transmission buffer  
When the top address of the transmission buffer has been entered, the area (address +  
0000 to 4055(8): 2094 bytes) will be allocated. Enter the top address at parameter address  
(34 to 36(8)).  
Parameter  
Details  
address(8)  
34  
Top address (word address) of transmission buffer  
- Address 34 is for the lower digit. Address 35 is for the upper digit.  
35  
36  
File number of the transmission buffer  
(Parameter details  
9
See Chapter 12.)  
2) Set the transmission buffer to "Used"  
Select whether or not to enable each message classification. Enter your choices at  
parameter address 37(8).  
Parameter  
Details  
address(8)  
37  
Enable/disable use of a transmission type buffer  
Setting value  
Message  
80(H) 81(H) 82(H) 83(H)  
Message other than transmission  
Messages other than SHARP's proprietary  
×
×
message format  
Transmission  
message  
Computer link function  
Remote function  
×
×
SHARP's  
proprietary format  
O: Used X: Not used  
3) Set the start switch  
Change the parameter setting at address 77(8) from 00(H) to 01(H), and transfer the setting  
details for the control module to the JW-50FL.  
Parameter address(8)  
Detail  
77  
Start switch  
To the next page  
9-2  
Chapter 9: Message transfers  
From the previous page  
2Setting transmission buffer (set the sending details)  
Specify the [information section] and [data section] to be used for sending messages to the  
transmission buffer (addresses +2000 to 3777(8), +4040 to 4055(8)).  
Transmission  
Details  
buffer address(8)  
+2000  
Sending [data section]  
to  
+3777  
+4040  
Node number of destination node.  
+4041  
Response message type (fixed to 00(H))  
Message (request) transaction code.  
Top address of the virtual address space.  
+4042 to 4043  
+4044 to 4047  
Sending  
[information section]  
Data length requesting to the virtual address  
space (word/byte).  
+4050 to 4051  
+4052  
Current fragment block number (fixed to 01(H))  
Total fragment block number (fixed to 01(H))  
Current block length (byte)  
+4053  
+4054 to 4055  
(Transmission buffer  
Next page.)  
3Execute a transmission  
Write an 01(H) at address +301 in the communication control area and the JW-50FL will send the  
contents of the transmission buffer [information section] and [data section] to the destination  
node. After sending the message, the details in the [data section] will be cleared.  
Communication  
9
(Communication control area  
See page 10-1.)  
Detail  
control address(8)  
+301  
Execute sending data  
Settings in the communication control area  
Enter the top address for the communication control area. The area (address +000 to 301(8)) will  
then be allocated. Use the parameter addresses 30 to 32(8) to enter the top address.  
When receive data  
4Receive (received to transmission buffer)  
The received data from a node are stored in the transmission buffer (address +0000 to 1777(8),  
+4000 to 40015(8)).  
Transmission  
Details  
buffer address(8)  
+0000  
Receiving [data section]  
to  
+1777  
+4000  
Node number of data sending node.  
+4001  
Response message type (fixed to 00(H))  
Message (response) transaction code.  
Top address of the virtual address space.  
+4002 to 4003  
+4004 to 4007  
Sending  
[information section]  
Data length requesting to the virtual address  
space (word/byte).  
+4010 to 4011  
+4012  
Current fragment block number (fixed to 01(H))  
Total fragment block number (fixed to 01(H))  
Current block length (byte)  
+4013  
+4014 to 4015  
9-3  
Chapter 9: Message transfers  
9-2 Transmission buffer  
This section describes the transmission buffer that is used for sending and receiving data for the  
message transfer.  
The transmission buffer area (+0000 to 4055(8)) is determined by entering top address to parameter  
(address 34 to 36(8)). (Parameter  
See Chapter 12.)  
Transmission  
buffer address(8)  
Details  
+0000  
Receiving [data section]  
to  
- When writing 00(H) to address +4000, the received data will be  
transferred to the control module (CPU board)  
+1777  
+2000  
Sending [data section] *1  
to  
+3777  
+4000  
Node number of the node sending data.  
Response message type (always 00(H))  
Transaction code (response).  
+4001  
+4002 to 4003  
+4004 to 4007  
Top address of the virtual address space.  
Receiving  
[information section]  
Data length of response from the virtual  
address space (word/byte).  
+4010 to 4011  
+4012  
Current fragment block number (always 01(H))  
Total fragment block number (always 01(H))  
Current block length (byte)  
+4013  
+4014 to 4015  
+4016 to 4037  
+4040  
9
Reserved area  
Node number of destination node. *2  
Response message type (always 00(H))  
Transaction code (request).  
+4041  
+4042 to 4043  
+4044 to 4047  
Top address of the virtual address space.  
*1 Sending  
[information section]  
Data length requesting to the virtual address  
space (word/byte).  
+4050 to 4051  
+4052  
Current fragment block number (always 01(H))  
Total fragment block number (always 01(H))  
Current block length (byte)  
+4053  
+4054 to 4055  
*1: The data in the transmission area [information section] and [data section] are transferred when  
01(H) is written at the base address +301 in the communication control area. After sending data,  
JW-50FL clears the setting data of the sending data section.  
*2: Enter 255(D) at the base address +4040. Then the data will be transferred to all the nodes  
currently connected.  
9-4  
Chapter 9: Message transfers  
[1] Allocation of available areas for the transmission buffer  
The allocation of available areas for the transmission buffer varies with the module on which the FL-net  
is installed.  
FL-net module  
Host PC  
Control module  
JW-21CU/22CU  
JW-31CUH1  
Details  
JW20H  
See below  
JW-20FL5  
JW-20FLT  
JW30H  
JW-32CUH1  
Next page  
JW-33CUH1/2/3  
FL-net board  
Host J-board  
Z-300 series  
Z-500 series  
CPU board  
Z-311J/312J/313J  
Z-511J  
Details  
See below  
Next page  
Z-336J  
FL-net module  
Host PC  
Memory module  
Details  
JW50H  
---  
JW-1MAH  
JW-2MAH  
JW-3MAH  
JW-4MAH  
JW-50FL  
Page 9-7  
JW70H  
JW100H  
(1) For the JW20H or J-board (Z-300 series)  
Allocation available data memory address  
for the transmission buffer  
Bit address(8)  
Byte address(8)  
File address(8)  
9
Relay  
00000 to 15777  
000000 to 001577  
001600 to 001777  
0000 to 1577  
1600 to 1777  
b0000 to b1777  
TMR/CNT contact point  
T-C000 to T-C777  
TMR/CNT current value  
---  
002000 to 003777  
09000 to 09777  
19000 to 19777  
29000 to 29777  
39000 to 39777  
49000 to 49777  
59000 to 59777  
69000 to 69777  
79000 to 79777  
89000 to 89777  
99000 to 99777  
004000 to 004777  
005000 to 005777  
006000 to 006777  
007000 to 007777  
010000 to 010777  
011000 to 011777  
012000 to 012777  
013000 to 013777  
014000 to 014777  
015000 to 015777  
Register  
---  
Self diagnosis result  
storage register  
---  
E0000 to E1777 016000 to 017777  
Note: Be careful not to allow the transmission buffer area to overlap with the common memory area.  
9-5  
Chapter 9: Message transfers  
(2) For the JW30H or J-board (Z-500 series)  
Allocation available data memory address  
for the transmission buffer  
Bit address(8)  
Byte address(8)  
File address(8)  
Relay  
00000 to 15777  
000000 to 001577  
001600 to 001777  
0000 to 1577  
TMR/CNT contact point  
T-C0000 to T-C0777  
1600 to 1777  
TMR/CNT/MD current value  
---  
b0000 to b1777 002000 to 003777  
09000 to 09777 004000 to 004777  
19000 to 19777 005000 to 005777  
29000 to 29777 006000 to 006777  
39000 to 39777 007000 to 007777  
49000 to 49777 010000 to 010777  
59000 to 59777 011000 to 011777  
69000 to 69777 012000 to 012777  
79000 to 79777 013000 to 013777  
89000 to 89777 014000 to 014777  
99000 to 99777 015000 to 015777  
E0000 to E5777 016000 to 023777  
Register  
---  
File 0  
Register  
(Possible to register error history)  
---  
E6000 to E7777 024000 to 025777  
b2000 to b3777 026000 to 027777  
TMR/CNT current value  
---  
Expansion relay  
20000 to 75777  
030000 to 035577  
035600 to 035777  
000000 to 037777  
000000 to 177777  
000000 to 177777  
000000 to 177777  
to  
2000 to 7577  
TMR/CNT contact point  
T-C1000 to T-C1777  
7600 to 7777  
9
File 1  
File 2  
---  
---  
---  
---  
to  
---  
---  
---  
---  
to  
File 3  
File 10(H)  
to  
File 14(H)  
to  
---  
to  
---  
to  
000000 to 177777  
to  
File 2C(H)  
---  
---  
000000 to 177777  
- The relationship between the control module (on which the memory module is installed) and the file  
memory is as follows.  
Control module  
File memory  
JW-31CUH1  
File 0  
File 0, 1, and 2  
JW-32CUH1 *  
(File 2 can be allocated to 000000 to 177777 or 000000 to 077777)  
JW-33CUH1  
JW-33CUH2  
JW-33CUH3  
File 0, 1 to 3  
File 0, 1 to 3 and 10 to 14(H)  
File 0, 1 to 3 and 10 to 2C(H)  
* File memory of J-board (Z-500 series) is the same as that of JW-32CUH1.  
Note: Be careful not to allow the transmission buffer area to overlap with the common memory area.  
9-6  
Chapter 9: Message transfers  
(3) For the JW50H/70H/100H  
Allocation available data memory address for common memory area  
Bit address(8)  
Byte address(8)  
0000 to 1577  
1600 to 1777  
File address(8)  
Relay  
00000 to 15777  
000000 to 001577  
TMR/CNT  
contact  
point  
T-C0000 to 0777  
T-C1000 to 1777  
001600 to 001777  
001300 to 001477 *  
1300 to 1477 *  
TMR/CNT-  
/MD  
current  
value  
---  
b0000 to b1777  
002000 to 003777  
09000 to 09777  
19000 to 19777  
29000 to 29777  
39000 to 39777  
49000 to 49777  
59000 to 59777  
69000 to 69777  
79000 to 79777  
89000 to 89777  
99000 to 99777  
E0000 to E0777  
E1000 to E1777  
---  
004000 to 004777  
005000 to 005777  
006000 to 006777  
007000 to 007777  
010000 to 010777  
011000 to 011777  
012000 to 012777  
013000 to 013777  
014000 to 014777  
015000 to 015777  
016000 to 016777  
017000 to 017777  
000000 to 177777  
000000 to 177777  
000000 to 177777  
to  
File 0  
Register  
---  
9
File 1  
File 2  
File 3  
to  
---  
---  
---  
to  
---  
---  
to  
File 7  
---  
---  
000000 to 177777  
* 1300 to 1477 (file addresses 001300 to 001477) are for shared use with the general-purpose  
relays. Therefore, if a timer/counter is set up with 1024 points, these file addresses cannot be used  
as general-purpose relays.  
- The relationship between the PC model (on which the memory module is installed) and the file  
memory is as follows.  
PC model Integrated memory module  
File memory  
File 0, 1 (000000 to 037777)  
File 0, 1 (000000 to 037777)  
File 0, 1 (000000 to 177777)  
JW50H  
---  
JW-1MAH  
JW-2MAH  
JW70H  
JW100H  
JW-3MAH  
JW-4MAH  
File 0, 1, 2  
File 1 to 7  
Note: Be careful not to allow the transmission buffer area to overlap with the common memory area.  
9-7  
Chapter 9: Message transfers  
9-3 Message transaction codes and execution conditions  
The transaction codes (TCD) and execution conditions for the messages supported by the JW-50FL  
are as follows.  
TCD: Transaction code  
Request Response  
Message execution  
conditions  
Messages supported by the JW-50FL  
TCD  
TCD  
Read byte-block data  
Write byte-block data  
Read word-block data  
Write word-block data  
65003  
65004  
65005  
65006  
65007  
65203  
65204  
65205  
65206  
65207  
Always possible  
*
Always possible  
*
Read network parameter  
Messages  
Always possible  
Possible only when the  
host PC has stopped  
Write network parameter  
65008  
65208  
other than  
transmission  
messages  
Stop instruction  
Operation instruction  
Read profile  
65009  
65010  
65011  
65013  
65014  
65015  
65209  
65210  
65211  
65213  
65214  
65215  
Always possible  
Read log data  
Clear log data  
Return message  
0 to 999  
Transmission messages  
1002 to 1199  
1202 to 59999  
Computer link function  
1000  
1200  
1201  
SHARP's  
proprietary  
message  
9
Remote monitor, remote  
programming function  
1001  
* When the high word (pages 9-10 to 15) is "0x0000 to 0x002C," execution is possible regardless of  
the host PC status (operation/stop).  
When the high word is not "0x0000 to 0x002C," execution is only possible when the host PC is  
stopped.  
Relationship of the selected transmission buffer and various messages  
Use selection of  
transmission type buffer *  
Message  
Transaction code (TCD)  
80(H)  
X
81(H)  
X
82(H)  
X
83(H)  
X
60000 to 65202 (request)  
Messages not  
transmission  
65203 to 65215 (response)  
0 to 999  
X
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
1000 (request computer link function: SHARP's  
proprietary function)  
X
X
O
O
1001 (request remote function: SHARP's proprietary  
function)  
X
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Transmission  
messages  
1002 to 1199  
1200 (response of computer link function: SHARP's  
proprietary function)  
1201 (response of remote function: SHARP's  
proprietary function)  
X
X
O
O
O
O
1202 to 59999  
O
O
(Transmission buffer --- O: Used, X: Not used)  
* When using the transmission buffer, set to parameter (address 37(8)).  
9-8  
Chapter 9: Message transfers  
9-4 Use of virtual address space and PC memory space  
This section describes the addresses used in the host PC by the FL-net.  
FL-net module  
Host PC  
Control module  
JW-21CU/22CU  
JW-31CUH1  
Details  
JW20H  
Next page  
JW-20FL5  
JW-20FLT  
JW30H  
JW-32CUH1  
Page 9-11 to 9-13  
JW-33CUH1/2/3  
FL-net board  
Host J-board  
Z-300 series  
Z-500 series  
CPU board  
Z-311J/312J/313J  
Z-511J  
Details  
See below  
Z-336J  
Page 9-11 to 13  
FL-net module  
Host PC  
Memory module  
Details  
JW50H  
---  
JW-1MAH  
JW-2MAH  
JW-3MAH  
JW-4MAH  
JW-50FL  
Page 9-14 to 15  
JW70H  
JW100H  
9
9-9  
Chapter 9: Message transfers  
(1) For the JW20H or J-board (Z-300 series)  
PC memory space  
Virtual address space  
Low word  
High  
word  
Byte block  
Word block  
0x0000 to 0x003F  
0x0040 to 0x007F  
0x0080 to 0x00FF  
0x0100 to 0x01BF  
0x01C0 to 0x01FF  
0x0200 to 0x023F  
0x0240 to 0x027F  
0x0280 to 0x02BF  
0x02C0 to 0x02FF  
0x0300 to 0x033F  
0x0340 to 0x037F  
0x0000 to 0x001F  
0x0020 to 0x003F  
0x0040 to 0x007F  
0x0080 to 0x00DF  
0x00E0 to 0x00FF  
0x0100 to 0x011F  
0x0120 to 0x013F  
0x0140 to 0x015F  
0x0160 to 0x017F  
0x0180 to 0x019F  
0x01A0 to 0x01BF  
0x01C0 to 0x01FF  
0x0200 to 0x03FF  
0x0400 to 0x04FF  
0000 to 0077  
0100 to 0177  
0200 to 0377  
0400 to 0677  
0700 to 0777  
Relay area  
0x0000  
1000 to 1077  
1100 to 1177  
1200 to 1277  
1300 to 1377  
1400 to 1477  
1500 to 1577  
TMR/CNT contact points  
0x0000 0x0380 to 0x03FF  
0x0000 0x0400 to 0x07FF  
0x0800 to 0x09FF  
1600 to 1777  
TMR/CNT/MD current value b0000 to b1777  
09000 to 09777  
19000 to 19777  
0x0A00 to 0x0BFF 0x0500 to 0x05FF  
0x0C00 to 0x0DFF 0x0600 to 0x06FF  
29000 to 29777  
39000 to 39777  
0x0E00 to 0x0FFF  
0x1000 to 0x11FF  
0x1200 to 0x13FF  
0x1400 to 0x15FF  
0x1600 to 0x17FF  
0x1800 to 0x19FF  
0x0700 to 0x07FF  
0x0800 to 0x08FF  
0x0900 to 0x09FF  
0x0A00 to 0x0AFF  
0x0B00 to 0x0BFF  
0x0C00 to 0x0CFF  
49000 to 49777  
59000 to 59777  
Register  
0x0000  
69000 to 69777  
9
79000 to 79777  
89000 to 89777  
99000 to 99777  
E0000 to E0777  
E1000 to E1777  
0x1A00 to 0x1BFF 0x0D00 to 0x0DFF  
0x1C00 to 0x1DFF 0x0E00 to 0x0EFF  
0x1E00 to 0x1FFF  
0x0F00 to 0x0FFF  
0x0000 to 0x1DFF  
0x0000 to 0x003F  
0x0040 to 0x007F  
0x0080 to 0x023F  
0x0000 to 0x003F  
0x0040 to 0x007F  
0x0080 to 0x00BF  
0x00C0 to 0x00FF  
0x0100 to 0x013F  
0x0140 to 0x017F  
0x0180 to 0x01BF  
0x01C0 to 0x01FF  
0x0000 to 0x001F  
0x0020 to 0x003F  
0x0040 to 0x005F  
0x0060 to 0x007F  
0x0080 to 0x009F  
0x00A0 to 0x00BF  
0x00C0 to 0x00DF  
Program  
000000 to 016777  
0000 to 0177  
0200 to 0377  
0400 to 2177  
A0-000 to 177  
A1-000 to 177  
A2-000 to 177  
A3-000 to 177  
A4-000 to 177  
A5-000 to 177  
A6-000 to 177  
A7-000 to 177  
B0-000 to 077  
B1-000 to 077  
B2-000 to 077  
B3-000 to 077  
B4-000 to 077  
B5-000 to 077  
B6-000 to 077  
0x0100  
0x0000 to 0x007F  
System memory  
0x0110 0x0080 to 0x00FF  
0x0100 to 0x047F  
0x0000 to 0x007F  
0x0080 to 0x00FF  
0x0100 to 0x017F  
0x0180 to 0x01FF  
0x00F0  
Special I/O parameter  
0x0200 to 0x027F  
0x0280 to 0x02FF  
0x0300 to 0x037F  
0x0380 to 0x03FF  
0x0000 to 0x003F  
0x0040 to 0x007F  
0x0080 to 0x00BF  
Option parameter  
0x00F1 0x00C0 to 0x00FF  
0x0100 to 0x013F  
0x0140 to 0x017F  
0x0180 to 0x01BF  
9-10  
Chapter 9: Message transfers  
(2) For the JW30H or J-board (Z-500 series)  
Files 0  
Virtual address space  
Low word  
PC memory space  
High  
word  
Byte block  
Word block  
0x0000 to 0x001F  
0x0020 to 0x003F  
0x0040 to 0x007F  
0x0080 to 0x00DF  
0x00E0 to 0x00FF  
0x0100 to 0x011F  
0x0120 to 0x013F  
0x0140 to 0x015F  
0x0160 to 0x017F  
0x0180 to 0x019F  
0x01A0 to 0x01BF  
0x01C0 to 0x01FF  
0x0200 to 0x03FF  
0x0400 to 0x04FF  
0x0000 to 0x003F  
0x0040 to 0x007F  
0x0080 to 0x00FF  
0x0100 to 0x01BF  
0x01C0 to 0x01FF  
0x0200 to 0x023F  
0x0240 to 0x027F  
0x0280 to 0x02BF  
0x02C0 to 0x02FF  
0x0300 to 0x033F  
0x0340 to 0x037F  
0000 to 0077  
0100 to 0177  
0200 to 0377  
0400 to 0677  
0700 to 0777  
Relay area  
0x0000  
1000 to 1077  
1100 to 1177  
1200 to 1277  
1300 to 1377  
1400 to 1477  
1500 to 1577  
TMR/CNT contact points  
0x0000 0x0380 to 0x03FF  
0x0000 0x0400 to 0x07FF  
0x0800 to 0x09FF  
1600 to 1777  
TMR/CNT/MD current value b0000 to b1777  
09000 to 09777  
19000 to 19777  
0x0A00 to 0x0BFF 0x0500 to 0x05FF  
0x0C00 to 0x0DFF 0x0600 to 0x06FF  
29000 to 29777  
39000 to 39777  
0x0E00 to 0x0FFF  
0x1000 to 0x11FF  
0x1200 to 0x13FF  
0x1400 to 0x15FF  
0x1600 to 0x17FF  
0x1800 to 0x19FF  
0x0700 to 0x07FF  
0x0800 to 0x08FF  
0x0900 to 0x09FF  
0x0A00 to 0x0AFF  
0x0B00 to 0x0BFF  
0x0C00 to 0x0CFF  
49000 to 49777  
59000 to 59777  
9
69000 to 69777  
79000 to 79777  
89000 to 89777  
Register  
0x0000  
99000 to 99777  
0x1A00 to 0x1BFF 0x0D00 to 0x0DFF  
0x1C00 to 0x1DFF 0x0E00 to 0x0EFF  
E0000 to E0777  
E1000 to E1777  
0x1E00 to 0x1FFF  
0x2000 to 0x21FF  
0x2200 to 0x23FF  
0x2400 to 0x25FF  
0x2600 to 0x27FF  
0x2800 to 0x29FF  
0x2A00 to 0x2B7F  
0x0F00 to 0x0FFF  
0x1000 to 0x10FF  
0x1100 to 0x11FF  
0x1200 to 0x12FF  
0x1300 to 0x13FF  
0x1400 to 0x14FF  
0x1500 to 0x15FF  
E2000 to E2777  
E3000 to E3777  
E4000 to E4777  
E5000 to E5777  
E6000 to E6777  
E7000 to E7777  
TMR/CNT/MD current value b2000 to b3777  
2000 to 2377  
0x0000 0x2C00 to 0x2FFF 0x1600 to 0x17FF  
0x3000 to 0x30FF  
0x3100 to 0x31FF  
0x1800 to 0x187F  
0x1880 to 0x18FF  
0x1900 to 0x19FF  
0x1A00 to 0x1A3F  
0x1A40 to 0x1DBF  
2400 to 2777  
Relay  
0x0000 0x3200 to 0x33FF  
0x3400 to 0x347F  
3000 to 3777  
4000 to 4177  
4200 to 7577  
7600 to 7777  
000000 to 076777  
100000 to 176777  
0000 to 0177  
0x3480 to 0x3B7F  
TMR/CNT contact points  
Program  
0x0000 0x3B80 to 0x3BFF 0x1DC0 to 0x1DFF  
0x0100  
0x0100  
0x0000 to 0x7DFF  
0x8000 to 0xFDFF  
0x0000 to 0x003F  
0x0040 to 0x007F  
0x0080 to 0x023F  
0x0000 to 0x007F  
System memory  
0200 to 0377  
0x0110 0x0080 to 0x00FF  
0x0010 to 0x047F  
0400 to 2177  
Continued on the next page  
9-11  
Chapter 9: Message transfers  
From the previous page  
Virtual address space  
Low word  
PC memory space  
High  
word  
Byte block  
Word block  
T00-000 to 177  
0x0000 to 0x007F  
0x0080 to 0x00FF  
0x0100 to 0x017F  
0x0180 to 0x01FF  
0x0200 to 0x027F  
0x0280 to 0x02FF  
0x0300 to 0x037F  
0x0380 to 0x03FF  
0x0400 to 0x047F  
0x0480 to 0x04FF  
0x0500 to 0x057F  
0x0580 to 0x05FF  
0x0600 to 0x067F  
0x0680 to 0x06FF  
0x0700 to 0x077F  
0x0780 to 0x07FF  
0x0800 to 0x087F  
0x0880 to 0x08FF  
0x0900 to 0x097F  
0x0980 to 0x09FF  
0x0A00 to 0x0A7F  
0x0000 to 0x003F  
0x0040 to 0x007F  
0x0080 to 0x00BF  
0x00C0 to 0x00FF  
0x0100 to 0x013F  
0x0140 to 0x017F  
0x0180 to 0x01BF  
0x01C0 to 0x01FF  
0x0200 to 0x023F  
0x0240 to 0x027F  
0x0280 to 0x02BF  
0x02C0 to 0x02FF  
0x0300 to 0x033F  
0x0340 to 0x037F  
0x0380 to 0x03BF  
0x03C0 to 0x03FF  
0x0400 to 0x043F  
0x0440 to 0x047F  
0x0480 to 0x04BF  
0x04C0 to 0x04FF  
0x0500 to 0x053F  
T01-000 to 177  
T02-000 to 177  
T03-000 to 177  
T04-000 to 177  
T05-000 to 177  
T06-000 to 177  
T07-000 to 177  
T10-000 to 177  
T11-000 to 177  
T12-000 to 177  
T13-000 to 177  
T14-000 to 177  
T15-000 to 177  
T16-000 to 177  
T17-000 to 177  
T20-000 to 177  
T21-000 to 177  
T22-000 to 177  
T23-000 to 177  
T24-000 to 177  
T25-000 to 177  
T26-000 to 177  
T27-000 to 177  
T30-000 to 177  
T31-000 to 177  
T32-000 to 177  
T33-000 to 177  
T34-000 to 177  
T35-000 to 177  
T36-000 to 177  
T37-000 to 177  
B0-000 to 077  
B1-000 to 077  
B2-000 to 077  
B3-000 to 077  
B4-000 to 077  
B5-000 to 077  
B6-000 to 077  
Special I/O parameter  
0x00F0  
9
0x0A80 to 0x0AFF 0x0540 to 0x057F  
0x0B00 to 0x0B7F 0x0580 to 0x05BF  
0x0B80 to 0x0BFF 0x05C0 to 0x05FF  
0x0C00 to 0x0C7F 0x0600 to 0x063F  
0x0C80 to 0x0CFF 0x0640 to 0x067F  
0x0D00 to 0x0D7F 0x0680 to 0x06BF  
0x0D80 to 0x0DFF 0x06C0 to 0x06FF  
0x0E00 to 0x0E7F  
0x0700 to 0x073F  
0x0E80 to 0x0EFF 0x0740 to 0x077F  
0x0F00 to 0x0F7F  
0x0F80 to 0x0FFF  
0x0000 to 0x003F  
0x0040 to 0x007F  
0x0080 to 0x00BF  
0x0780 to 0x07BF  
0x07C0 to 0x07FF  
0x0000 to 0x001F  
0x0020 to 0x003F  
0x0040 to 0x005F  
0x0060 to 0x007F  
0x0080 to 0x009F  
0x00A0 to 0x00BF  
0x00C0 to 0x00DF  
Option parameter  
0x00F1 0x00C0 to 0x00FF  
0x0100 to 0x013F  
0x0140 to 0x017F  
0x0180 to 0x01BF  
9-12  
Chapter 9: Message transfers  
Files 1 to 3 and 10 to 2C(H)  
PC memory space  
Virtual address space  
Low word  
High word  
File number(H)  
File address  
Byte block  
Word block  
1
2
000000 to 037777  
000000 to 177777  
000000 to 177777  
000000 to 177777  
000000 to 177777  
000000 to 177777  
000000 to 177777  
000000 to 177777  
000000 to 177777  
000000 to 177777  
000000 to 177777  
000000 to 177777  
000000 to 177777  
000000 to 177777  
000000 to 177777  
000000 to 177777  
000000 to 177777  
000000 to 177777  
000000 to 177777  
000000 to 177777  
000000 to 177777  
000000 to 177777  
000000 to 177777  
000000 to 177777  
000000 to 177777  
000000 to 177777  
000000 to 177777  
000000 to 177777  
000000 to 177777  
000000 to 177777  
000000 to 177777  
000000 to 177777  
0x0001  
0x0002  
0x0003  
0x0010  
0x0011  
0x0012  
0x0013  
0x0014  
0x0015  
0x0016  
0x0017  
0x0018  
0x0019  
0x001A  
0x001B  
0x001C  
0x001D  
0x001E  
0x001F  
0x0020  
0x0021  
0x0022  
0x0023  
0x0024  
0x0025  
0x0026  
0x0027  
0x0028  
0x0029  
0x002A  
0x002B  
0x002C  
0x0000 to 0x3FFF  
0x0000 to 0xFFFF  
0x0000 to 0xFFFF  
0x0000 to 0xFFFF  
0x0000 to 0xFFFF  
0x0000 to 0xFFFF  
0x0000 to 0xFFFF  
0x0000 to 0xFFFF  
0x0000 to 0xFFFF  
0x0000 to 0xFFFF  
0x0000 to 0xFFFF  
0x0000 to 0xFFFF  
0x0000 to 0xFFFF  
0x0000 to 0xFFFF  
0x0000 to 0xFFFF  
0x0000 to 0xFFFF  
0x0000 to 0xFFFF  
0x0000 to 0xFFFF  
0x0000 to 0xFFFF  
0x0000 to 0xFFFF  
0x0000 to 0xFFFF  
0x0000 to 0xFFFF  
0x0000 to 0xFFFF  
0x0000 to 0xFFFF  
0x0000 to 0xFFFF  
0x0000 to 0xFFFF  
0x0000 to 0xFFFF  
0x0000 to 0xFFFF  
0x0000 to 0xFFFF  
0x0000 to 0xFFFF  
0x0000 to 0xFFFF  
0x0000 to 0xFFFF  
0x0000 to 0x1FFF  
0x0000 to 0x7FFF  
0x0000 to 0x7FFF  
0x0000 to 0x7FFF  
0x0000 to 0x7FFF  
0x0000 to 0x7FFF  
0x0000 to 0x7FFF  
0x0000 to 0x7FFF  
0x0000 to 0x7FFF  
0x0000 to 0x7FFF  
0x0000 to 0x7FFF  
0x0000 to 0x7FFF  
0x0000 to 0x7FFF  
0x0000 to 0x7FFF  
0x0000 to 0x7FFF  
0x0000 to 0x7FFF  
0x0000 to 0x7FFF  
0x0000 to 0x7FFF  
0x0000 to 0x7FFF  
0x0000 to 0x7FFF  
0x0000 to 0x7FFF  
0x0000 to 0x7FFF  
0x0000 to 0x7FFF  
0x0000 to 0x7FFF  
0x0000 to 0x7FFF  
0x0000 to 0x7FFF  
0x0000 to 0x7FFF  
0x0000 to 0x7FFF  
0x0000 to 0x7FFF  
0x0000 to 0x7FFF  
0x0000 to 0x7FFF  
0x0000 to 0x7FFF  
3
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
1A  
1B  
1C  
1D  
1E  
1F  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
2A  
2B  
2C  
9
- The relationship between the control module (on which the memory module is installed) and the file  
memory is as follows.  
Control module  
File memory  
JW-31CUH1  
File 0  
File 0, 1, and 2  
JW-32CUH1 *  
(File 2 can be allocated to 000000 to 177777 or 000000 to 077777)  
JW-33CUH1  
JW-33CUH2  
JW-33CUH3  
File 0, 1 to 3  
File 0, 1 to 3 and 10 to 14(H)  
File 0, 1 to 3 and 10 to 2C(H)  
* File memory of J-board (Z-500 series) is the same as that of JW-32CUH1.  
9-13  
Chapter 9: Message transfers  
(3) For the JW50H/70H/100H  
Files 0  
Virtual address space  
Low word  
PC memory address  
High  
word  
Byte block  
Word block  
0x0000 to 0x003F  
0x0040 to 0x007F  
0x0080 to 0x00FF  
0x0100 to 0x01BF  
0x01C0 to 0x01FF  
0x0200 to 0x023F  
0x0240 to 0x027F  
0x0280 to 0x02BF  
0x02C0 to 0x02FF  
0x0300 to 0x033F  
0x0340 to 0x037F  
0x0380 to 0x03FF  
0x02C0 to 0x033F  
00x0000 to 0x001F  
00x0020 to 0x003F  
00x0040 to 0x007F  
00x0080 to 0x00DF  
00x00E0 to 0x00FF  
00x0100 to 0x011F  
00x0120 to 0x013F  
00x0140 to 0x015F  
00x0160 to 0x017F  
00x0180 to 0x019F  
00x01A0 to 0x01BF  
00x01C0 to 0x01FF  
00x0160 to 0x019F  
0x0200 to 0x03FF  
0x0400 to 0x04FF  
0000 to 0077  
0100 to 0177  
0200 to 0377  
0400 to 0677  
0700 to 0777  
1000 to 1077  
1100 to 1177  
1200 to 1277  
1300 to 1377  
1400 to 1477  
1500 to 1577  
1600 to 1777  
1300 to 1477  
Relay area  
0x0000  
0x0000  
*
TMR/CNT contact points  
TMR/CNT/MD current value b0000 to b1777  
09000 to 09777  
0x0000 0x0400 to 0x07FF  
0x0800 to 0x09FF  
19000 to 19777  
0x0A00 to 0x0BFF 0x0500 to 0x05FF  
0x0C00 to 0x0DFF 0x0600 to 0x06FF  
9
29000 to 29777  
39000 to 39777  
0x0E00 to 0x0FFF  
0x1000 to 0x11FF  
0x1200 to 0x13FF  
0x1400 to 0x15FF  
0x1600 to 0x17FF  
0x1800 to 0x19FF  
0x0700 to 0x07FF  
0x0800 to 0x08FF  
0x0900 to 0x09FF  
0x0A00 to 0x0AFF  
0x0B00 to 0x0BFF  
0x0C00 to 0x0CFF  
49000 to 49777  
59000 to 59777  
Register  
0x0000  
69000 to 69777  
79000 to 79777  
89000 to 89777  
99000 to 99777  
E0000 to E0777  
E1000 to E1777  
0x1A00 to 0x1BFF 0x0D00 to 0x0DFF  
0x1C00 to 0x1DFF 0x0E00 to 0x0EFF  
0x1E00 to 0x1FFF  
0x0F00 to 0x0FFF  
0x0000 to 0x7DFF  
0x8000 to 0xFDFF  
0x0000 to 0x003F  
0x0040 to 0x007F  
0x0080 to 0x023F  
000000 to 076777  
Program  
0x0100  
0x0100  
100000 to 176777  
0000 to 0177  
0x0000 to 0x007F  
System memory  
0200 to 0377  
0400 to 2177  
0x0110 0x0080 to 0x00FF  
0x0100 to 0x047F  
* When the timer/counter is set to use 1024 points, 1300 to 1400 cannot be used as general-  
purpose relays.  
9-14  
Chapter 9: Message transfers  
Files 1 to 7  
PC memory address  
Virtual address space  
Low word  
High  
word  
File No.  
File address(8)  
000000 to 177777  
000000 to 177777  
000000 to 177777  
000000 to 177777  
000000 to 177777  
000000 to 177777  
000000 to 177777  
Byte block  
Word block  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0x0001 0x0000 to 0xFFFF  
0x0002 0x0000 to 0xFFFF  
0x0003 0x0000 to 0xFFFF  
0x0004 0x0000 to 0xFFFF  
0x0005 0x0000 to 0xFFFF  
0x0006 0x0000 to 0xFFFF  
0x0007 0x0000 to 0xFFFF  
00x0000 to 0x7FFF  
00x0000 to 0x7FFF  
00x0000 to 0x7FFF  
00x0000 to 0x7FFF  
00x0000 to 0x7FFF  
00x0000 to 0x7FFF  
00x0000 to 0x7FFF  
- Relationship between the host PC (memory module) and the file memory is as follows.  
Host PC  
Memory module  
---  
Details  
JW50H  
File 0, 1 (000000 to 037777)  
File 0, 1 (000000 to 037777)  
File 0, 1 (000000 to 177777)  
JW-1MAH  
JW-2MAH  
JW70H  
JW100H  
JW-3MAH  
JW-4MAH  
File 0, 1, 2  
File 1 to 7  
9
9-15  
Chapter 9: Message transfers  
9-5 Computer link function  
(Compatible with Satellite net: SHARP's proprietary message format)  
The computer link function is SHARP's proprietary transmission message format (request TCD1000,  
response TCD12000, and can be used between PCs equipped with a SHARP FL-net module (board).  
1Send (request)  
2Receive (response)  
FL-net  
This  
node  
Target  
node  
1Specify the node number, command details, and transaction code to communicate from this  
node.  
2The message (command) is received, the messages are processed and a response is returned.  
The command contains three types: read, write, and control commands.  
Type  
Function  
Monitor relay  
Monitor timer/counter current value  
Monitor the register  
Read program memory  
Read system memory  
Read date  
Read command  
Read time  
9
Set/reset relay  
Set/reset timer or counter  
Write to register  
Write same data to register  
Write program  
Write command  
Write to system memory  
Set date  
Set time  
Monitor PC operation status  
PC stop/release stop operation  
Set write enable mode  
Control command  
Monitor write enable mode  
9-16  
Chapter 9: Message transfers  
[1] Setting the computer link to send and receive data  
When a computer link message format is used, the sending and receiving details of the transmission  
buffer are set as follows.  
1Setting the sending details (command)  
Put the address of the [information section] and [data section] containing the data to be sent in the  
transmission buffer (base address +2000 to 3777(8), and base address +4040 to 4055(8)).  
Transmission  
Details  
buffer address(8)  
Header (40 bytes)  
+2000  
- Normally, all 40 bytes to 00(H).  
When you want to communicate crossover  
two layers including Ethernet, enter  
to  
expansion header.  
- [5] Two layer communication with Ethernet.  
+2047  
Sending  
[data section]  
+2050  
+2051  
+2052  
+2053  
to  
c-ID: 47(H)  
Command  
page 9-  
14.  
ATTR: 00(H)  
COM: Command code - Page 9-14.  
Command Text: Command detail  
- [3] Description of each command  
+3777  
+4040  
+4041  
+4042 to 4043  
Node number of destination node.  
00(H) (Response message type)  
1000(H) (Transaction code: request)  
00(H) (Top address of the virtual address  
space)  
+4044 to 4047  
+4050 to 4051  
Sending  
[information section]  
9
00(H) (Data length requesting to the virtual  
address space)  
+4052  
01(H) (Current fragment block number)  
01(H) (Total fragment block number)  
00(H) (Current block length)  
+4053  
+4054 to 4055  
(Transmission buffer table  
Page 9-4.)  
2Transmit the data  
Write 01(H) at the base address +301 in communication control area and the details in the trans-  
mission buffer will be sent to the destination node.  
Communication control  
Details  
(Communication control area table  
See page 10-1.)  
area address(8)  
+301  
Transfer the data  
Communication control area settings  
Enter the top address of the communication control area and the area (base address +000 to  
301(8)) will be allocated. Enter the top address at parameter addresses 30 to 32(8).  
12-1.  
Page  
Continued on the next page.  
9-17  
Chapter 9: Message transfers  
From the previous page  
3Receive (response details)  
The details of the data received (response) from the node to communicate is stored in the transmis-  
sion buffer (base address +0000 to 1777(8), and base address +4000 to 4015(8)).  
Transmission  
Details  
buffer address(8)  
Header (40 bytes)  
+0000  
- Normally, set 00(H) all 40 bytes.  
to  
When to communicate crossover two layers including  
Ethernet, enter expansion header.  
- [5] Two layer communication with Ethernet.  
+0047  
+0050  
+0051  
+0052  
r-ID: 45(H)  
ATTR: 00(H)  
Response  
the next  
page.  
Receiving  
data  
[information  
section]  
COM: Command code - See page 9-14.  
RSLT: Command execution result  
Normal end with 00(H)  
+0053  
A result that is not 00(H) is an error code.  
- [4] Computer link, Error code table  
- When used as error code, there is no response text.  
+0054  
Response Text: Response detail  
- [3] Description of each command  
to  
+1777  
+4000  
Node number of destination node.  
9
+4001  
00(H) (Response message type)  
+4002 to 4003  
+4004 to 4007  
+4010 to 4011  
+4012  
1200(H) (Transaction code: response)  
00(H) (Top address of the virtual address space)  
00(H) (Data length requesting to the virtual address space)  
01(H) (Current fragment block number)  
01(H) (Total fragment block number)  
00(H) (Current block length)  
Sending  
data  
[information  
section]  
+4013  
+4014 to 4015  
9-18  
Chapter 9: Message transfers  
[2] Basic format of computer link commands  
(1) Communication format  
When a computer link is used, data sent from this node to a target node is referred to as a [com-  
mand], and data received from the target node by this node is referred to as a [response]. The  
communication format for commands and responses is as follows.  
ËCommand  
+2000  
+2047 +2050 +2051  
+2052 +2053  
Header (40 bytes)  
c-ID ATTR COM  
Command Text  
ËResponse  
+0000  
+0047 +0050 +0051  
+0052 +0053  
+0054  
Header (40 bytes)  
r-ID ATTR COM RSLT  
Response Text  
Header  
: Normally, all 40 bytes are 00(H).  
If you want to communicate with Ethernet over two layers, you have to use an exten-  
sion header.  
(See "[5] Two-layer communication with Ethernet")  
c-ID  
: 47(H)  
r-ID  
: 45(H)  
ATTR  
COM  
RSLT  
: 00(H)  
: Command code (See page 9-14)  
: Command execution result  
Normally terminated with 00(H)  
If any byte other than 00(H) is found, an error code will be output (See "[4] Computer  
link error code table").  
If an error code is output, there is no response text.  
Command Text : Command details (See "[3] Descriptions of each command")  
Response Text : Response details (See "[3] Descriptions of each command")  
9
[Example] When you want to monitor the ON/OFF status of relay 04033  
See page 9-17.  
ËCommand  
Command Text  
Header (40 bytes)  
c-ID  
ATTR  
COM  
00  
00  
47  
00  
20  
00  
03  
01  
03  
File address  
000403(8) = 0103(H)  
Bit 3  
File 0  
Relay No. 04033  
ËResponse  
Response Text  
Header (40 bytes)  
ATTR  
COM  
RSLT  
r-ID  
00  
00  
45  
00  
20  
00  
00  
03  
File address  
01  
03  
01  
ON  
Bit 3  
000403(8) = 0103(H)  
File 0  
Relay No. 04033  
Remarks  
The maximum data length for read/write operations is 1024 bytes. In case of two-layer communication  
with the Ethernet, however, the maximum length is 256 bytes. For the UDP, the total number of bytes  
from the header to the command text must be less than 1024 bytes.  
9-19  
Chapter 9: Message transfers  
(2) Memory address expression format  
The format expressing memory address contained in the command (command text/response text) is  
as shown below. ( For more details, refer to "[3] Descriptions of each command.")  
PSEG : Program segment (corresponds to the file number.)  
JW20H  
J-board (Z-300 series) J-board (Z-500 series)  
08(H)  
JW30H  
JW50H/70H/100H  
PSEG  
08(H), 09(H)  
08(H), 09(H)  
- Memory capacity varies with type of control module and memory module used. The  
values above are the maximum values.  
PADR : Program address  
JW20H  
J-board (Z-300 series) J-board (Z-500 series)  
0000 to 1DFF(H) 0000 to 7DFF(H)  
JW30H  
JW50H/70H/100H  
0000 to 7DFF(H)  
PADR  
- Memory capacity varies with type of control module and memory module used. The  
values above are the maximum values.  
The program address is to be designated using PSEG and PADR.  
Address 000000 to 076777(8)  
Address 100000 to 176777(8)  
: PSEG = 8, PADR is the address expressed in hexa-  
decimal notation.  
: PSEG = 9, PADR is the value in hexadecimal nota-  
tion obtained by subtracting 100000(8) from the ad  
dress.  
[Example] Address 043256(8) : PSEG = 08(H), PADR= 46AE(H)  
Address 153762(8) : PSEG= 09(H), PADR = 57F2(H)  
DSEG : Data memory segment (corresponds to the file number.)  
9
JW20H  
J-board (Z-300 series) J-board (Z-500 series)  
00(H)  
JW30H  
JW50H/70H/100H  
DSEG  
00(H) to 03(H), 10 to 2C(H)  
00(H) to 07(H)  
- Memory capacity varies with type of control module and memory module used. The  
values above are the maximum values.  
DADR : Data memory address (corresponds to the file number.)  
JW20H  
J-board (Z-300 series)  
JW30H  
J-board (Z-500 series)  
JW50H/70H/100H  
(Setting value  
(Setting value  
of the DSEG)  
00(H)  
0000 to 3BFF(H) of the DSEG) 0000 to 1FFF(H)  
00(H)  
DADR  
0000 to 1FFF(H)  
01(H)  
0000 to 3FFF(H)  
02 to 03(H)  
10 to 2C(H)  
0000 to FFFF(H)  
0000 to FFFF(H)  
01 to 07(H)  
0000 to FFFF(H)  
- Memory capacity varies with type of control module and memory module used. The values above  
are the maximum values.  
9-20  
Chapter 9: Message transfers  
BLOC : Bit location on the data memory  
The register (file register) is to be designated using DSEG and DADR.  
[Example] Register 09000  
: DSEG = 00(H), DADR = 0800(H)  
030000 of the file 1 : DSEG = 01(H), DADR = 3000(H)  
The relay address is to be designated using DSEG, DADR, and BLOC.  
The destination is made by the combination of the file address and the bit location.  
[Example] Relay 07252: DSEG = 00(H), DADR = 01D5(H), BLOC = 02(H)  
(bit 2 of the file address 000725 (]0725))  
TADR : Timer/counter number  
To assign a timer/counter number, use TADR. (Hexadecimal notation)  
JW20H JW30H  
J-board (Z-300 series) J-board (Z-500 series)  
0000 to 01FF(H) 0000 to 03FF(H)  
SADR : System memory address  
JW50H/70H/100H  
0000 to 03FF(H)  
TADR  
To assign a system memory address, use SADR. (Hexadecimal notation)  
SEG should be assigned in the command. Always specify 08(H).  
JW20H  
J-board (Z-300 series) J-board (Z-500 series)  
0000 to 00FF(H) 0000 to 047F(H)  
JW30H  
JW50H/70H/100H  
0000 to 047F(H)  
SADR  
(3) Execution condition  
1Write enable mode  
Each command will be executed or depending on the current status of the write enable mode.  
Write enable mode  
Mode 0  
Details  
Writing to all of memory is prohibited  
Writing is only enabled to data memory  
Writing is enabled to all of memory  
Mode 1  
Mode 2  
9
When the power is first applied, the module is in "mode 0." Therefore, if you want to write data  
from the host computer, change to "mode 1 or "mode 2" using the setting command (command  
code F9(H)). The current status can be read using the reading command (command code E9(H))  
for the write enable command.  
2PC operation status  
Some commands can be executed when the PC halts operation (writing programs: Command  
code 14(H) etc.). Other commands can be executed whether the PC is halted or is running (read-  
ing programs: Command code 04(H) etc.)  
9-21  
Chapter 9: Message transfers  
(4) Table of commands  
Command code  
Contents  
See page  
04(H)  
14(H)  
20(H)  
23(H)  
24(H)  
30(H)  
32(H)  
34(H)  
35(H)  
44(H)  
54(H)  
A2(H)  
A3(H)  
B2(H)  
B3(H)  
E8(H)  
E9(H)  
F8(H)  
F9(H)  
Reading program  
Write program  
Monitoring relay  
The current value monitor of the timers/counters  
Monitoring register  
Set/reset relay  
Set/reset timer/counter  
Write in register  
Write same data to register  
Read out the system memory  
Write to the system memory  
Read date  
Read time  
Set date  
Set time  
Monitor PC operation status  
Read out write enable mode  
Halt and release halting of PC  
Selecting the write enable mode  
9-34  
9-35  
9-25  
9-28  
9-29  
9-26  
9-27  
9-30  
9-31  
9-32  
9-33  
9-36  
9-38  
9-37  
9-39  
9-40  
9-23  
9-41  
9-24  
9
9-22  
Chapter 9: Message transfers  
[3] Descriptions of each command  
This section describes the "COM" settings and the items thereafter of the communication formats (page  
9-19).  
Read out write enable mode (COM=E9(H))  
[Format]  
ËCommand  
COM   
ËResponse  
COM  RSLT WMOD  
COM  
= E9(H)  
WMOD = 00(H) : Mode 0 (All memory write-disabled)  
01(H) : Mode 1 (Only the data memory write-enabled)  
02(H) : Mode 2 (All memory write-enabled)  
[Function]  
- Reads the status of the write-enable mode.  
[Execution condition]  
- Write enable mode : Mode 0, mode 1 and mode 2  
- PC operation status : Stopping, operating  
[Example]  
9
- Reads the status of the write-enable mode.  
ËCommand  
E9  
ËResponse  
E9  
00  
02  
Mode 2 (All memory write-enabled)  
9-23  
Chapter 9: Message transfers  
Selecting the write enable mode COM = F9(H)  
[Format]  
ËCommand  
COM WMOD  
ËResponse  
COM RSLT  
COM  
= F9(H)  
WMOD = 00(H) : Mode 0 (All memory write-disabled)  
01(H) : Mode 1 (Only the data memory write-enabled)  
02(H) : Mode 2 (All memory write-enabled)  
[Function]  
- Selecting the write enable mode.  
[Execution condition]  
- Write enable mode : Mode 0, mode 1 and mode 2  
- PC operation status : Stopping, operating  
[Example]  
- Set the write enable mode to mode 2 (Writing is enable to all of memory).  
ËCommand  
F9  
02  
Mode 2 (All memory write-enabled)  
ËResponse  
F9 00  
9
9-24  
Chapter 9: Message transfers  
Monitoring relay (COM = 20(H))  
[Format]  
ËCommand  
COM DSEG DADRL DADRH BLOC  
ËResponse  
COM RSLT DSEG DADRL DADRH BLOC DATA  
COM  
= 20(H)  
DSED  
= Segment (00 to 07, 10 to 2C(H))  
See page 9-20.  
See page 9-20.  
DADRL, H = Byte address (0000(H) to FFFF(H))  
BLOC  
DATA  
= Bit position (00(H) to 07(H))  
= Read data (00(H): OFF, 01(H): ON)  
[Function]  
- Read the bit data (relay) shown in DSEG, DADR, and BLOC.  
[Execution condition]  
- Write enable mode : Mode 0, mode 1 and mode 2  
- PC operation status : Stopping, operating  
[Example]  
- Monitor the ON/OFF status of relay number 04033.  
ËCommand  
20  
00  
03  
01  
03  
Bit 3  
File address  
000403(8) = 0103(H)  
File 0  
9
Relay number 04033  
ON  
ËResponse  
20 00  
00  
03  
01  
03  
01  
File address  
000403(8) = 0103(H)  
Bit 3  
File 0  
Relay number 04033  
9-25  
Chapter 9: Message transfers  
Set/reset relay (COM = 30(H))  
[Format]  
ËCommand  
COM DSEG DADRL DADRH BLOC DATA  
ËResponse  
COM RSLT DSEG DADRL DADRH BLOC  
COM  
= 30(H)  
DSED  
= Segment (00 to 07, 10 to 2C(H))  
See page 9-20.  
See page 9-20.  
DADRL, H = Byte address (0000(H) to FFFF(H))  
BLOC  
DATA  
= Bit position (00(H) to 07(H))  
= Set/reset data (00(H): reset, 01(H): set)  
[Function]  
- Set/reset the relays shown in DSEG, DADR, and BLOC.  
[Execution condition]  
- Write enable mode : Mode 1 and mode 2  
- PC operation status : Stopping, operating  
[Example]  
- Set relay number 07001.  
Set  
ËCommand  
30  
00  
C0  
01  
01  
01  
File address  
000700(8) = 01C0(H)  
Bit 1  
9
File 0  
Relay number 07001  
ËResponse  
30 00  
00  
C0  
01  
01  
File address  
000700(8) = 01C0(H)  
Bit 1  
File 0  
Relay number 07001  
9-26  
Chapter 9: Message transfers  
Set/reset timer/counter (COM = 32(H))  
[Format]  
ËCommand  
COM TADRL TADRH DATA  
ËResponse  
COM RSLT TADRL TADRH  
COM  
= 32(H)  
TADRL, H = Timer-counter number (0000(H) to 03FF(H))  
See page 9-21.  
DATA  
= Set/reset data (00(H): reset, 01(H): set)  
[Function]  
- Set/reset the timer/counter displayed on TADR.  
[Execution condition]  
- Write enable mode  
- PC operation status  
: Mode 1 and mode 2  
: Stopping, operating  
[Example]  
- Set TMR0002.  
ËCommand  
32  
02  
00  
01  
Timer and counter  
number 0002  
Set  
ËResponse  
32 00  
9
02  
00  
Timer and counter  
number 0002  
9-27  
Chapter 9: Message transfers  
The current value monitor of the timers/counters (COM = 23(H))  
[Format]  
ËCommand  
COM TADRL TADRH  
LL  
LH  
ËResponse  
......  
COM RSLT TADRL TADRH  
L
L
L
H
DATA1  
ATTRN  
......  
DATAN  
ATTR1  
COM  
TADRL, H = Timer and counter number (0000(H) to 03FF(H))  
= Number of data to read  
= 23(H)  
See page 9-21.  
LL, H  
DATA1 to N = The current value data (read current value field of the timer and the counter)  
ATTR1 to N = The attribute data of the timer and the counter  
[Function]  
- Reads the current values and the attributes of the timers/counters identified by the starting number  
TADR and the number of data L.  
- Up to 256 timers/counters can be read at a time.  
- The current value data is read from the timer/counter's current range (b0000 to xxxxx ).  
- The attributes are as shown below :  
00(H)  
01(H)  
02(H)  
04(H)  
08(H)  
09(H)  
Not in use  
MD  
0A(H) UTMR(BCD)  
0B(H) UTMR(BIN)  
0C(H) DCNT(BCD)  
0D(H) DCNT(BIN)  
0E(H) UCNT(BCD)  
0F(H) UCNT(BIN)  
CNT  
TMR  
9
DTMR(BCD)  
DTMR(BIN)  
[Execution condition]  
- Write enable mode  
- PC operation status  
: Mode 0, mode 1 and mode 2  
: Stopping, operating  
[Example]  
- Reads the current values of TMR0000 and TMR0001.  
ËCommand  
23  
00  
00  
02  
00  
Top number of  
the timer and  
the counter  
Number of data  
ËResponse  
23 00  
00  
00  
02  
00  
34  
92  
78  
D6  
08  
0A  
Top number of  
the timer and  
the counter  
The current  
value of  
TMR0000  
1234  
The current  
value of  
TMR0001  
5678  
DTMR UTMR  
(BCD) (BCD)  
Number of data  
9-28  
Chapter 9: Message transfers  
Monitoring register COM = 24(H)  
[Format]  
ËCommand  
COM DSEG DADRL DADRH  
LL  
LH  
ËResponse  
......  
COM RSLT DSEG DADRL DADRH  
LL  
LH  
DATA1  
DATAN  
COM  
= 24(H)  
DSEG  
= Segment (00 to 07, 10 to 2C(H))  
See page 9-20.  
See page 9-20.  
DADRL, H = Byte address (0000(H) to FFFF(H))  
LL, H  
= Data length (Number of bytes)  
DATA1 to N = Read data  
[Function]  
- Read the register data with the length shown by L, starting from DSEG, DADR.  
- Up to 1024 bytes can be read at a time.  
[Execution condition]  
- Write enable mode  
- PC operation status  
: Mode 0, mode 1 and mode 2  
: Stopping, operating  
[Example]  
- Read 4 bytes data from register 09000 to 09003.  
ËCommand  
24  
00  
00  
08  
04  
00  
9
File address  
0800(H) = 004000(8)  
Data length  
File number 0  
Top register  
number 09000  
ËResponse  
24 00  
00  
00  
08  
04  
00  
00  
4F  
32  
01  
File address  
0800(H) = 004000(8)  
Data length  
File number 0  
Value at Value at Value at Value at  
09000 09001 09002 09003  
Top register  
number 09000  
9-29  
Chapter 9: Message transfers  
Write in register (COM = 34(H))  
[Format]  
ËCommand  
......  
COM DSEG DADRL DADRH  
LL  
LH  
DATA1  
DATAN  
ËResponse  
COM RSLT DSEG DADRL DADRH  
LL  
LH  
COM  
DSEG  
= 34(H)  
= Segment (00 to 07, 10 to 2C(H))  
DADRL, H = Byte address (0000(H) to FFFF(H))  
See page 9-20.  
See page 9-20.  
LL, H  
= Data length (number of bytes)  
DATA1 to N = Write data  
[Function]  
- Write the register data with the length shown by L, starting from DSEG, DADR.  
- Up to 1024 bytes can be write at a time.  
[Execution condition]  
- Write enable mode  
- PC operation status  
: Mode 1 and mode 2  
: Stopping, operating  
[Example]  
- Write 00(H), 4F(H), 32(H), and 01(H) to registers 09000 to 09003.  
ËCommand  
34  
00  
00  
08  
04  
00  
00  
4F  
32  
01  
9
File address  
0800(H) = 004000(8)  
Data length  
File number 0  
Value at Value at Value at Value at  
09000  
09001 09002  
09003  
Top register  
number 09000  
ËResponse  
34  
00  
00  
00  
08  
04  
00  
File address  
0800(H) = 004000(8)  
Data length  
File number 0  
Top register  
number 09000  
9-30  
Chapter 9: Message transfers  
Write same data to register (COM = 35(H))  
[Format]  
ËCommand  
COM DSEG DADRL DADRH  
ËResponse  
COM RSLT DSEG DADRL DADRH  
L
L
L
H
DATA  
L
L
LH  
COM  
DSEG  
= 35(H)  
= Segment (00 to 07, 10 to 2C(H))  
DADRL, H = Byte address (0000(H) to FFFF(H))  
See page 9-20.  
See page 9-20.  
LL,H  
DATA  
= Data length (number of bytes)  
= Write data  
[Function]  
- Write the same data with the length shown by L, starting from DSEG, DADR.  
[Execution condition]  
- Write enable mode  
- PC operation status  
: Mode 1 and mode 2  
: Stopping, operating  
[Example]  
- Write 4F(H) to register 19000 to 19003 (4 bytes).  
ËCommand  
35  
00  
00  
0A  
04  
00  
4F  
File address  
0A00(H) = 005000(8)  
9
Data length  
File number 0  
Data  
Top register  
number 19000  
ËResponse  
35 00  
00  
00  
0A  
04  
00  
File address  
0A00(H) = 005000(8)  
Data length  
File number 0  
Top register  
number 19000  
9-31  
Chapter 9: Message transfers  
Read out the system memory (COM = 44(H))  
[Format]  
ËCommand  
SADRL  
COM SEG  
ËResponse  
COM RSLT SEG SADRL SADRH  
SADRH  
L
L
L
H
......  
L
L
LH  
DATA1  
DATAN  
COM  
SEG  
= 44(H)  
= Segment (08(H))  
SADRL,H = System memory address (0000(H) to 047F(H))  
= Data length (number of bytes)  
See page 9-21.  
LL,H  
DATA1 to N = Read data  
[Function]  
- Read the system memory data with the length shown by L, starting from SEG, SADR.  
[Execution condition]  
- Write enable mode  
- PC operation status  
: Mode 0, mode 1 and mode 2  
: Stopping, operating  
[Example]  
- Read data of system memory #204 to 207.  
ËCommand  
44  
08  
84  
00  
04  
00  
System memory  
address  
0084(H)000204(8)  
Data length  
9
ËResponse  
44 00  
08  
84  
00  
04  
00  
80  
01  
08  
00  
System memory  
address  
0084(H)000204(8)  
Data length  
Value at Value at Value at Value at  
#204 #205 #206 #207  
9-32  
Chapter 9: Message transfers  
Write to the system memory (COM = 54(H))  
[Format]  
ËCommand  
......  
COM SEG SADRL SADRH  
ËResponse  
COM RSLT SEG SADRL SADRH  
LL  
L
H
DATA1  
DATAN  
L
L
LH  
COM  
SEG  
= 54(H)  
= Segment (08(H))  
SADRL, H = System memory address (0000(H) to 047F(H))  
= Data length (number of bytes)  
See page 9-21.  
LL, H  
DATAL to N = Write data  
[Function]  
- Write the system memory data with the length shown by L, starting from SEG, SADR.  
[Execution condition]  
- Write enable mode  
- PC operation status  
: Mode 2  
: Stopping  
[Example]  
- Set 81(H), 00(H), 00(H), and 04(H) to system memory #204 to #207.  
ËCommand  
54  
08  
84  
00  
04  
00  
81  
00  
00  
04  
9
System memory  
address  
0084(H)000204(8)  
Data length  
Value at Value at Value at Value at  
#204  
#205  
#206  
#207  
ËResponse  
54 00  
08  
84  
00  
04  
00  
System memory  
address  
0084(H)000204(8)  
Data length  
9-33  
Chapter 9: Message transfers  
Reading program (COM = 04(H))  
[Format]  
ËCommand  
COM PSEG PADRL PADRH  
LL  
LH  
LL  
ËResponse  
......  
COM RSLT PSEG PADRL PADRH  
LH  
DATA1  
DATAN  
COM  
= 04(H)  
PSEG  
= Program segment (08(H), 09(H))  
See page 9-20.  
See page 9-20.  
PADRL,H = Program address (0000(H) to 7DFF(H))  
= Data length (number of words)  
LL,H  
DATA1 to N = Read data (2 bytes = one step)  
[Function]  
- Read a program with a length (number of words) shown by L, from address PSEG, PADR.  
- Up to 512 words can be read at a time.  
[Execution condition]  
- Write enable mode  
- PC operation status  
: Mode 0, mode 1 and mode 2  
: Stopping, operating  
[Example]  
- Read the contents of the program address 000000 to 000002 (file number 8).  
ËCommand  
04  
08  
00  
00  
03  
00  
9
Top program  
address  
Data length  
ËResponse  
04  
00  
08  
00  
00  
03  
00  
00  
80  
00  
91  
Top program  
address  
Data length  
Address  
000000 contents  
Address  
000001 contents  
08  
B8  
Address  
000002 contents  
Note: Inquiries concerning the bit configuration of programs cannot be accepted.  
9-34  
Chapter 9: Message transfers  
Write program (COM = 14(H))  
[Format]  
ËCommand  
.....  
COM PSEG PADRL PADRH  
LL  
LH  
DATA1  
DATAN  
ËResponse  
COM RSLT PSEG PADRL PADRH  
LL  
LH  
COM  
PSEG  
= 14(H)  
= Program segment (08(H), 09(H))  
See page 9-20.  
See page 9-20.  
PADRL, H = Program address (0000(H) to 7DFF(H))  
= Data length (number of words)  
LL, H  
DATA1 to N = Write data (2 bytes = one step)  
[Function]  
- Write a program with a length (number of words) shown by L, from address PSEG, PADR.  
- Up to 512 words can be write at a time.  
[Execution condition]  
- Write enable mode  
- PC operation status  
: Mode 2  
: Stopping  
[Example]  
- Write the contents below in program address 000000 to 000002 (file number 8).  
ËCommand  
14  
08  
00  
00  
03  
00  
00  
80  
00  
91  
08  
B8  
9
Top program  
address  
Data length  
Address  
Address  
Address  
000000 contents  
000001 contents 000002 contents  
ËResponse  
14 00  
08  
00  
00  
03  
00  
Top program  
address  
Data length  
Note: Inquiries concerning the bit configuration of programs cannot be accepted.  
9-35  
Chapter 9: Message transfers  
Read date (COM = A2(H))  
[Format]  
ËCommand  
COM  
ËResponse  
COM RSLT  
Y
M
D
DW  
COM  
Y
M
= A2(H)  
= Year (express lower two digits of Western year, 00(H) to 99(H))  
= Month (01(H) to 12(H))  
D
= Date (01(H) to 31(H))  
DW  
= Day of week (00(H): Sunday, 01(H): Monday, 02(H): Tuesday, 03(H): Wednesday, 04(H): Thurs  
day, 05(H): Friday, 06(H): Saturday)  
[Function]  
- Read date data.  
[Execution condition]  
- Write enable mode  
- PC operation status  
: Mode 0, mode 1 and mode 2  
: Stopping, operating  
[Example]  
- Read date data.  
ËCommand  
A2  
9
ËResponse  
A2  
00  
99  
12  
17  
05  
’99  
December 17  
Friday  
9-36  
Chapter 9: Message transfers  
Set date (COM = B2(H))  
[Format]  
ËCommand  
COM  
Y
M
D
DW  
ËResponse  
RSLT  
COM  
COM  
Y
M
= B2(H)  
= Year (express lower two digits of Western year in BCD. 00(H) to 99(H))  
= Month (01(H) to 12(H))  
D
= Date (01(H) to 31(H))  
DW  
= Day of week (00(H): Sunday, 01(H): Monday, 02(H): Tuesday, 03(H): Wednesday, 04(H): Thurs  
day, 05(H): Friday, 06(H): Saturday)  
[Function]  
- Set date data.  
[Execution condition]  
- Write enable mode  
- PC operation status  
: Mode 1 and mode 2  
: Stopping, operating  
[Example]  
- Set data to Friday, January 23, 1999.  
ËCommand  
B2  
99  
01  
23  
06  
9
'99  
January  
23  
Saturday  
ËResponse  
B2 00  
9-37  
Chapter 9: Message transfers  
Read time (COM = A3(H))  
[Format]  
ËCommand  
COM  
ËResponse  
COM RSLT  
H
M
S
COM  
H
M
= A3(H)  
= Hour  
= Minute  
(00(H) to 23(H): BCD)  
(00(H) to 59(H): BCD)  
S
= Second (00(H) to 59(H): BCD)  
[Function]  
- Read time data.  
[Execution condition]  
- Write enable mode  
- PC operation status  
: Mode 0, mode 1 and mode 2  
: Stopping, operating  
[Example]  
- Read time data.  
ËCommand  
A3  
ËResponse  
9
A3  
00  
21  
12  
37  
21 o’clock 12 minutes 37 seconds  
9-38  
Chapter 9: Message transfers  
Set time (COM = B3(H))  
[Format]  
ËCommand  
COM  
H
M
S
CTRL  
ËResponse  
COM ACK  
COM  
H
M
=B3(H)  
= Hour  
= Minute  
(00(H) to 23(H): BCD)  
(00(H) to 59(H): BCD)  
S
= Second (00(H) to 59(H): BCD)  
CTRL  
= Control data  
00(H): Run clock  
01(H): Stop clock  
[Function]  
- Write time data  
[Execution condition]  
- Write enable mode  
- PC operation status  
: Mode 1 and mode 2  
: Stopping, operating  
[Example]  
- Set time data to 18 o'clock, 10 minutes, and 20 seconds.  
ËCommand  
9
B3  
18  
10  
20  
00  
18 o’clock 10 minutes 20 seconds Run clock  
ËResponse  
B3 00  
9-39  
Chapter 9: Message transfers  
Monitor PC operation status (COM = E8(H))  
[Format]  
ËCommand  
COM MODE  
ËResponse  
COM RSLT MODE  
COM  
= E8(H)  
MODE  
= 00(H): Operating  
01(H): Stopped operation by an instruction from other module.  
02(H): Stopped operation by an instruction from this module.  
[Function]  
- Monitor PC run/stop status.  
[Execution condition]  
- Write enable mode  
- PC operation status  
: Mode 0, mode 1 and mode 2  
: Stopping, operating  
[Example]  
- Monitor PC operation status.  
ËCommand  
E8  
ËResponse  
9
E8  
00  
00  
Operating  
9-40  
Chapter 9: Message transfers  
Halt and release halting of PC(COM = F8(H))  
[Format]  
ËCommand  
COM MODE  
ËResponse  
COM RSLT MODE  
COM  
= F8(H)  
MODE  
= 00(H): Release halt  
01(H): Halt  
[Function]  
- Halt/release halting of PC operation.  
[Execution condition]  
- Write enable mode  
- PC operation status  
: Mode 0, mode 1 and mode 2  
: Stopping, operating  
[Example]  
- Halt PC operation  
ËCommand  
F8  
01  
Stopping  
ËResponse  
F8 00  
9
01  
9-41  
Chapter 9: Message transfers  
[4] Computer link error code table  
RSLT  
(Hexadecimal)  
Details  
Normally end  
00  
01  
06  
07  
0F  
13  
10  
Format error  
PC does not stop operation  
Verify error of write command.  
Time out while accessing memory.  
Tried to set/reset TMR/CNT while PC stops operation.  
Miss match write enable mode.  
9
9-42  
Chapter 9: Message transfers  
[5] Two-layer communication with the Ethernet  
In order to communicate with the Ethernet on a different layer, use the following information in the  
communication format header (see page 9-19) as an extension header.  
Host computer  
00(H)  
00(H)  
00(H)  
00(H)  
PDA  
PSA  
FT0  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
PSA  
Ethernet  
PC  
PO0  
EA1  
40 bytes  
PDA  
(JW-255CM)  
PO0  
(JW-20FL5/20FLT)  
FT1  
00(H)  
PC  
39  
40  
FL-net  
EA1  
(JW-20FL5/20FLT)  
[An example of using the JW-20FL5/20FLT]  
Command line  
- When making a two-layer communication with the FL-net, the frame needs to contain the information  
including the source, transit stations, and destination, and slot number (i.e. designating the communi-  
cation path). The FL-net uses eight bits to represent a station number. For that reason, when designat-  
ing a module on the Ethernet, a station number for the FL-net needs to be designated. The address is  
referred to as a pseudo station number.  
9
(a) PDA  
: Pseudo destination address  
Designate the station number of JW-255CM that connects with the Ethernet. This  
may be any value within the range of 1 to 254 that can be discriminated from other  
equipment on the Ethernet.  
(b) PSA  
: Pseudo source address  
Designate the station number for the equipment sending the command. This may be  
any value within the range of 1 to 254 that can be discriminated from other  
equipment on the Ethernet.  
With respect to the response, the pseudo target station number that is given by the  
command will be set.  
(c) FT0  
(d) PO0  
: Frame type 0  
Designate 60(H).  
: Transit slot number  
Designate the slot number on the transit station PC that the FL-net module JW-  
20FL5/20FLT is installed on. This number is 2, 3 ... up to 7 from the next position of  
the control module (in case ZW-6CC is used.)  
: End target station address  
(e) EA1  
(f) FT1  
Designate the end target station address 1 to 254 on the FL-net.  
: Frame type 1  
Set the 40(H).  
(g) Command line: Command/response line  
c-ID/r-ID and after of communication format (page 9-19)  
9-43  
Chapter 9: Message transfers  
Note  
The two-layer communication is possible only with the computer link to the module on the FL-net from  
the host computer on the Ethernet via transit stations. Communication in the reverse direction, or the  
computer link from the host computer on the FL-net to this module, is not possible.  
Example: In the following example as shown in the diagram, the expansion header needs to be as  
follows.  
00(H)  
00(H)  
192.9.200.3  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
00(H)  
00(H)  
PSA 03  
Ethernet  
PDA = 05(H)  
PSA = 03(H)  
FT0 = 60(H)  
PO0 = 03(H)  
EA1 = 10(H)  
FT1 = 40(H)  
192.9.200.5  
40 bytes  
PDA  
05  
PO0  
Slot 3  
00(H)  
39  
40  
FL-net  
9
EA1  
Command line  
20(8)  
9-44  
Chapter 9: Message transfers  
9-6 Remote programming and remote monitor functions  
The remote programming and remote monitor functions are methods for operating a PC on another node  
connected to the FL-net. These are proprietary SHARP functions. These functions can be used only  
between PCs that are quipped with SHARP FL-net modules (boards). You can access these functions  
using the following support devices.  
- Hand held programmer: JW-14PG  
- Ladder software: JW-100SP, JW-92SP, and JW-52SP  
Although these functions use request TCD (1001) and response TCD (1201) in transmission type mes-  
sages, users are not required to make any settings.  
[1] Function  
- When connecting to a standard network.  
Support  
tool  
n
n+2  
n-2  
n-1  
n+2  
FL-net  
You can do the following using a support device connected to node "n."  
- Change the program (Writing to the program while the PC is operating is not allowed, for safety  
reasons. Change the program only after stopping the PC operation.)  
- Monitor remotely  
9
- Change the parameter memory (only possible using the JW-14PG).  
- When connected to an expansion network  
Support  
tool  
*
m
n-2  
n-1  
n+1  
n+2  
m+1 m+2  
FL-net  
FL-net  
* The JW20H (JW-20FL5/20FLT) cannot be used as a junction station ("n+2" station or "m "station).  
Use a JW30H (JW-20FL5/20FLT) or a JW50H/70H/100H (JW-50FL).  
Using a support tool that is connected to node "n," you can do the following.  
- Change the program (Writing to the program while the PC is operating is not allowed, for safety  
reasons. Change the program only after stopping the PC operation.)  
- Monitor remotely  
- Change the parameter memory (only possible using the JW-14PG).  
9-45  
Chapter 9: Message transfers  
[2] Example operation  
The example below shows the procedure for using the JW-100SP ladder logic programming software.  
For details about the operation of other support tools, see their respective manuals.  
1Connect a personal computer to the module on the FL-net.  
Personal  
computer  
Communication  
adapter  
(JW-100SA)  
 This  
Connector  
for the  
programmer  
module  
Ladder  
-
JW 20FL5  
programming  
support software  
(JW-100SP)  
LN TX RX  
1
2
V
T
PE HE  
S7 S6 S5 S4 S3 S2  
S1  
S0  
ON  
S
H
I
E
L
D
OFF  
FG  
Connection cable  
RESET  
(JW-22KC/24KC)  
(JW-20FL5)  
[For connection with the JW-  
50FL, use the ZW-3KC.]  
2Communication settings  
Set the JW-100SP communication settings to "network" and enable remote programming and  
remote monitoring.  
Start the JW-100SP  
Click [Setting] on the menu bar.  
The "Set" menu will appear.  
9
Click [Communication setting] on the "Set" menu.  
The [Communication setting] dialog box will appear.  
Click on "Network" and then click on "Detail settings."  
The [Detail setting] dialog box will appear.  
9-46  
Chapter 9: Message transfers  
3Network settings  
Select whether a node (target station) that will be used to execute remote programming and remote  
monitoring is on a standard network connection or an extended connection.  
In the figure below, nodes numbered 10 to 12 are standard connections. Nodes numbered 1 to 3 are  
extended network connections.  
Personal  
computer  
Slot No.  
12 (Junction station)  
0 (Master station)  
Target station  
3
0
1
2
3
1
2
11  
10  
FL-net  
FL-net  
When connecting to a standard network  
In the "Detail setting" dialog box, select "Standard" for the network configuration.  
Set the module type for the target station to "ME-NET."  
Enter the station number (1 to 249) of the target station.  
9
When connecting to an extended network  
In the "Detail setting" dialog box, select "Extended" for the network configuration.  
Set the module type for the junction station to "ME-NET."  
Set the module type for the target station to "ME-NET."  
Enter the station number (1 to 249) of the target station.  
(In the case of the example above, enter 2)  
Enter the station number (1 to 249) of the junction station.  
(In the case of the example above, enter 12)  
Enter the rack number of the junction station.  
(In the case of the example above, leave it at 0)  
Enter the slot number of the junction station.  
(Enter the target station's insertion slot number in the host station. In the example above,  
enter 3.)  
9-47  
Chapter 10: Communication Control  
A participating node list flag, an operation status flag, error status flag, local node management table,  
participating nodes management table, and network management table are set up in the communica-  
tion control area of the JW-50FL.  
(Complete setting procedure for the JW-50FL => See page 8-3.)  
Communication Address(8)  
Reference  
section  
Control details  
control area  
*
+000  
to  
Participating  
nodes list flag  
Participating status of each node in the  
network  
[1]  
[2]  
[3]  
[4]  
+037  
+040  
to  
Operation status  
flag  
Operation information for each node  
Error information of each node  
Information concerning own node  
+077  
+100  
to  
Error status flag  
+137  
+140  
to  
Local node  
management  
table  
+233  
+234  
to  
Participating  
node  
management  
table  
Node number information written to the  
base address +300  
[5]  
+253  
+254  
to  
Network  
management  
table  
Information common to the network  
[6]  
---  
+267  
10  
Node number to read information to the  
participating node management table  
(address +234 to 253)  
Node number to  
read information  
+300  
+301  
Write 01(H) is written to this address, the  
data in the transmission area [information  
and data sections] of the transmission  
buffer is sent to the target node.  
Transmit the data  
---  
* Addresses +000 to 301(8) are offset addresses calculated from the top address of the communica-  
tion control area. Enter the top address for the communication control area as a parameter at  
addresses 30 to 32(8)).  
Parameter  
Details  
address(8)  
30  
31  
32  
Top address (word address) of the communication control area in the PC.  
- Address 30 is for the lower digit. Address 31 is for the upper digit.  
File number of the communication control area in a PC.  
(Parameter => See Chapter 12)  
10-1  
Chapter 10: Communication Control  
[1] Participating nodes list flag  
Shows the participation status of each node in the network  
Node number (correspond to bit number of  
each address) *2  
*1  
Address(8)  
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0   
+000  
+001  
+002  
+003  
+004  
+005  
+006  
+007  
+010  
+011  
+012  
+013  
+014  
+015  
+016  
+017  
+020  
+021  
+022  
+023  
+024  
+025  
+026  
+027  
+030  
+031  
+032  
+033  
+034  
+035  
+036  
+037  
7
15  
23  
31  
39  
47  
55  
63  
71  
79  
87  
95  
6
14  
22  
30  
38  
46  
54  
62  
70  
78  
86  
94  
5
13  
21  
29  
37  
45  
53  
61  
69  
77  
85  
93  
4
12  
20  
28  
36  
44  
52  
60  
68  
76  
84  
92  
3
11  
19  
27  
35  
43  
51  
59  
67  
75  
83  
91  
99  
2
10  
18  
26  
34  
42  
50  
58  
66  
74  
82  
90  
98  
1
9
8
16  
17  
24  
25  
32  
33  
40  
41  
48  
49  
56  
57  
64  
65  
72  
73  
80  
81  
88  
89  
103 102 101 100  
96  
97  
111 110 109 108 107 106  
119 118 117 116 115 114  
127 126 125 124 123 122  
135 134 133 132 131 130  
143 142 141 140 139 138  
151 150 149 148 147 146  
159 158 157 156 155 154  
167 166 165 164 163 162  
175 174 173 172 171 170  
183 182 181 180 179 178  
191 190 189 188 187 186  
199 198 197 196 195 194  
207 206 205 204 203 202  
215 214 213 212 211 210  
223 222 221 220 219 218  
231 230 229 228 227 226  
239 238 237 236 235 234  
247 246 245 244 243 242  
254 253 252 251 250  
104  
112  
120  
128  
136  
144  
152  
160  
168  
176  
184  
192  
200  
208  
216  
224  
232  
240  
248  
105  
113  
121  
129  
137  
145  
153  
161  
169  
177  
185  
193  
201  
209  
217  
225  
233  
241  
249  
10  
*1: Addresses +000 to 037(8) are offset addresses calculated from the top address that is stored in the  
parameter at addresses 30 to 32(8).  
*2: 1 to 254 express each node number. By turning the bits in these addresses on and off, the participat-  
ing status of each node can be represented.  
1 to 254  
(node No.)  
ON  
OFF  
Bit showing this  
node's status  
This node is participating in the  
network  
This node is not participating in the  
network.  
Bit showing other Node associated with this node  
node's status  
Node associated with this node number  
number is participating in the network. is not participating in the network.  
10-2  
Chapter 10: Communication Control  
[2] Operation status flag  
Shows the operation information for each node  
Node number (correspond to bit number of  
each address) *2  
*1  
Address(8)  
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0   
+040  
+041  
+042  
+043  
+044  
+045  
+046  
+047  
+050  
+051  
+052  
+053  
+054  
+055  
+056  
+057  
+060  
+061  
+062  
+063  
+064  
+065  
+066  
+067  
+070  
+071  
+072  
+073  
+074  
+075  
+076  
+077  
7
15  
23  
31  
39  
47  
55  
63  
71  
79  
87  
95  
6
14  
22  
30  
38  
46  
54  
62  
70  
78  
86  
94  
5
13  
21  
29  
37  
45  
53  
61  
69  
77  
85  
93  
4
12  
20  
28  
36  
44  
52  
60  
68  
76  
84  
92  
3
11  
19  
27  
35  
43  
51  
59  
67  
75  
83  
91  
99  
2
10  
18  
26  
34  
42  
50  
58  
66  
74  
82  
90  
98  
1
9
8
16  
17  
24  
25  
32  
33  
40  
41  
48  
49  
56  
57  
64  
65  
72  
73  
80  
81  
88  
89  
103 102 101 100  
96  
97  
111 110 109 108 107 106  
119 118 117 116 115 114  
127 126 125 124 123 122  
135 134 133 132 131 130  
143 142 141 140 139 138  
151 150 149 148 147 146  
159 158 157 156 155 154  
167 166 165 164 163 162  
175 174 173 172 171 170  
183 182 181 180 179 178  
191 190 189 188 187 186  
199 198 197 196 195 194  
207 206 205 204 203 202  
215 214 213 212 211 210  
223 222 221 220 219 218  
231 230 229 228 227 226  
239 238 237 236 235 234  
247 246 245 244 243 242  
254 253 252 251 250  
104  
112  
120  
128  
136  
144  
152  
160  
168  
176  
184  
192  
200  
208  
216  
224  
232  
240  
248  
105  
113  
121  
129  
137  
145  
153  
161  
169  
177  
185  
193  
201  
209  
217  
225  
233  
241  
249  
10  
*1: Addresses +040 to 077(8) are offset address calculated from the top address that is stored in the  
parameter at addresses 30 to 32(8)).  
*2: 1 to 254 express each node number. By turning the bits in these addresses on and off, the participat-  
ing status of each node can be represented.  
1 to 254 (node nbr.)  
ON  
OFF  
Bit to express own  
node  
This node is participating in the  
network  
This node is not participating in the  
network.  
Node associated with this number is Node associated with this number is  
operating. (RUN = 1: Not in program not operating. (RUN = 0: Program  
Bit to express other  
nodes  
mode)*  
mode)*  
* When other nodes are allocated by controllers from other manufacturers, follow the specifications  
of their PCs.  
10-3  
Chapter 10: Communication Control  
[3] Error status flag  
Shows the error information for each node  
Node number (correspond to bit number of  
each address) *2  
*1  
Address(8)  
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0   
+100  
+101  
+102  
+103  
+104  
+105  
+106  
+107  
+110  
+111  
+112  
+113  
+114  
+115  
+116  
+117  
+120  
+121  
+122  
+123  
+124  
+125  
+126  
+127  
+130  
+131  
+132  
+133  
+134  
+135  
+136  
+137  
7
15  
23  
31  
39  
47  
55  
63  
71  
79  
87  
95  
6
14  
22  
30  
38  
46  
54  
62  
70  
78  
86  
94  
5
13  
21  
29  
37  
45  
53  
61  
69  
77  
85  
93  
4
12  
20  
28  
36  
44  
52  
60  
68  
76  
84  
92  
3
11  
19  
27  
35  
43  
51  
59  
67  
75  
83  
91  
99  
2
10  
18  
26  
34  
42  
50  
58  
66  
74  
82  
90  
98  
1
9
8
16  
17  
24  
25  
32  
33  
40  
41  
48  
49  
56  
57  
64  
65  
72  
73  
80  
81  
88  
89  
103 102 101 100  
96  
97  
111 110 109 108 107 106  
119 118 117 116 115 114  
127 126 125 124 123 122  
135 134 133 132 131 130  
143 142 141 140 139 138  
151 150 149 148 147 146  
159 158 157 156 155 154  
167 166 165 164 163 162  
175 174 173 172 171 170  
183 182 181 180 179 178  
191 190 189 188 187 186  
199 198 197 196 195 194  
207 206 205 204 203 202  
215 214 213 212 211 210  
223 222 221 220 219 218  
231 230 229 228 227 226  
239 238 237 236 235 234  
247 246 245 244 243 242  
254 253 252 251 250  
104  
112  
120  
128  
136  
144  
152  
160  
168  
176  
184  
192  
200  
208  
216  
224  
232  
240  
248  
105  
113  
121  
129  
137  
145  
153  
161  
169  
177  
185  
193  
201  
209  
217  
225  
233  
241  
249  
10  
*1: Addresses +100 to 137(8) are offset addresses calculated from the top address that is stored in the  
parameter at addresses 30 to 32(8)).  
*2: 1 to 254 are express node number. By turning the bits in these addresses on and off, the participat-  
ing status of each node can be represented.  
1 to 254 (node nbr.)  
ON  
OFF  
Bit showing this  
node's status  
This node is participating in the  
network  
This node is not participating in  
the network.  
The status of the node  
The status of the node  
associated with this number is  
ALARM .  
(Has a non battery error or is not  
functioning.)*  
associated with this number is  
NORMAL or WARNING.  
(NORMAL: No problem  
WARNING: Battery error)*  
Bit showing other  
node's status  
* When other nodes are allocated by controllers from other manufacturers, follow the specifications  
for their PCs.  
10-4  
Chapter 10: Communication Control  
[4] Local node management table  
This section shows the information about the local node as part of the network control information.  
Corresponding  
header information  
Address(8)  
Details  
+140  
Node number  
+141  
Reserved area  
+142 to 153  
+154 to 165  
+166 to 177  
+200  
Node name (facility name)  
Vendor name  
Manufacturer's model name  
This node's status  
+201  
Reserved area  
+202  
FA link layer status => See below  
Reserved area  
LKS  
ULS  
+203  
+204 to 205  
+206 to 207  
+210 to 211  
+212 to 213  
+214 to 215  
+216  
Status of the upper layer => See below  
Common memory (area 1) storage address C_AD1  
Common memory (area 1) storage size C_SZ1  
Common memory (area 2) storage address C_AD2  
Common memory (area 2) storage size  
Token monitor time-out time  
Reserved area  
C_SZ2  
TW  
+217  
+220  
Minimum allowable time between frames  
Reserved area  
MFT  
+221  
+222  
Protocol version  
PVER  
+223  
Reserved area  
10  
*1: Addresses +140 to 223(8) are offset addresses calculated from the top address that is stored in the  
parameter at addresses 30 to 32(8).  
FA link layer status (LKS)  
Shows the FA link status of the network.  
Base address +202  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0  
Bit  
Spare  
Upper layer operation signal error  
Notice to be effective common memory data  
Complete common memory settings (address size)  
Detected duplicate use of the same address  
Upper layer status (ULS)  
Show the upper layer status using RUN/STOP (1 bit), UERR (2 bits), and UERR CODE (12  
Base address +205  
+204  
bits).  
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0  
U ERR CODE  
Reserved bit  
(Upper layer error code:  
Defined by the upper layer)  
U ERR  
00NORMAL  
01WARNING  
10ALARM  
11ALARM  
0STOP  
1RUN  
10-5  
Chapter 10: Communication Control  
[5] Participating node management table  
Shows the information for the node numbers at address offset +300 for each table.  
Corresponding  
Address(8)  
Details  
header information  
Common memory (area 1) storage address C_AD1  
Common memory (area 1) storage size C_SZ1  
Common memory (area 2) storage address C_AD2  
+224 to 225  
+226 to 227  
+230 to 231  
+232 to 233  
+234  
Common memory (area 2) storage size  
FA link layer status  
C_SZ2  
LKS  
+235  
Reserved area  
+236 to 237  
+240  
Upper layer status  
ULS  
TW  
Token monitor timeout time  
Reserved area  
+241  
+242  
Minimum allowable time between frames  
Reserved area  
MTF  
RCT  
+243  
+244 to 245  
+246 to 253  
Time allowed for the refresh cycle  
Reserved  
- Addresses +224 to 253(8) are offset addresses calculated from the top address that is stored in the  
parameter at addresses 30 to 32(8).  
- The details of the offset addresses at +234 (FA link layer status) and at +236 to 237 (upper layer  
status) are the same as for offset addresses +202 and +204 to 205 in the Local Node Control  
Table.  
[6] Network management table  
Shows the information shared by the network.  
Corresponding  
Address(8)  
Details  
header information  
10  
+254  
Token holding the node number  
Reserved area  
+255  
+256  
Minimum allowable time between frames  
Reserved area  
MFT  
+257  
+260 to 261  
+262 to 263  
+264 to 265  
+266 to 267  
Refresh cycle measured time (calculated value)  
Refresh cycle measured time (current value)  
Refresh cycle measured time (max. value)  
Refresh cycle measured time (min. value)  
- Addresses +254 to 267(8) are offset addresses calculated from the top address that is stored in the  
parameter at addresses 30 to 32(8).  
10-6  
Chapter 11: SEND/RECEIVE function  
The SEND/RECEIVE functions are exclusive SHARP functions. These can only be used between PCs  
equipped with FL-net modules (board).  
Note: The SEND/RECEIVE functions can be used only when a JW30H, JW50H/70H/100H, or a J-  
board (Z-500 series) is used as the host PC. This function cannot be used with the JW20H or J-  
board (Z-300 series).  
The SEND/RECEIVE functions allow the exchange of data between certain nodes within a specified  
maximum time. The SEND function is used to declare a target node and write data from that node. The  
RECEIVE function is used to declare which node will return data to the node issuing the call and then it  
receives the data.  
[An example of the SEND function]  
Request to write  
Response  
FL-net  
Node  
1
Node  
4
Node  
2
Node  
3
[An example of the RECEIVE function]  
Request to read  
Response  
FL-net  
Node  
1
Node  
2
Node  
3
Node  
4
- Dedicated instructions are used to execute the SEND/RECEIVE functions.  
Dedicated  
Detail  
instruction  
F-203 (OPCH) Declare a station to communicate with (single layer)  
F-204 (SEND) Write data to the target station  
11  
F-205 (RCV) Read data from the target station  
Enter the module No. (port No.)/channel of the host module (board) by using the F-203 (OPCH) instruc-  
tion. This instruction includes the target node number, and the data memory address in the target node.  
Enter the data memory address for number of bytes to be transferred using the F-204 (SEND) / F-205  
(RCV) instructions. Using these instructions, when the JW-50FL receives a response from the target  
node, it completes this function automatically. There is no need for special program for the target node  
PC.  
- When using the SEND/RECEIVE functions, the data route between the control module (CPU board)  
and FL-net module (board) is referred to as a "channel." There are four channels (CH0 to CH3) for  
each module (board). Each channel can transfer 256 bytes of data. Therefore, in a ladder program, up  
to four SEND/RECEIVE functions can be executed at once.  
[Ex.]  
Control module  
FL-net module (node 2)  
CH0  
CH1  
CH2  
CH3  
Node 3  
Node 4  
Node 5  
Node 6  
11-1  
Chapter 11: SEND/RECEIVE function  
11-1 Operation of SEND/RECEIVE instruction  
[1] SEND  
This function operates by the combination of F-203 (OPCH) and F-204 (SEND).  
(1) When the module is used (host PC: JW30H, J-board (Z-500 series))  
F-203  
OPCH  
UN-  
CH-ST  
D
fileN  
S
F-204  
SEND  
n
- Setting range of S  
UN  
CH  
: Module No. switch set value of the module (0 to 6).  
: Channel number within the specified module (board) (0 to 3).  
In the PC program, the same port number can be called 4  
times, once for each channel (CH0, CH1, CH2, and CH3).  
: Target node number (01 to FE(H))  
: Data area in the target node PC (file number)  
: Top file address of the data area in the target node PC  
: Number of data bytes transmitted (000 to 377(8), 256 bytes at  
000)  
0000 to 1577  
2000 to 7577  
b0000 to b1777  
b2000 to b3777  
09000 to 99777  
E0000 to E7777  
ST  
fileN  
D
File1 000000 to 037777  
@0000 to @1574  
@2000 to @7574  
@b0000 to @b1774  
@b2000 to @b3774  
@09000 to @99774  
@E0000 to @E7774  
File1 @000000 to @037774  
n
S
: Data area top register of source station data  
Target node  
file N  
This node  
file 0  
CH number  
corresponding to  
the UN number  
D ->  
S ->  
Send  
n
Response  
Flag  
11  
Flag status during and after the operation  
Non-  
carry  
07354  
Zero Carry Error  
07357 07356 07355  
Description  
No response  
from the module  
(board)  
Set value on the UN and module No. switch set  
value of the communication module are different.  
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
This condition may instantaneously occur while  
other send instruction is being executed.  
However, as soon as the condition becomes clear  
for the execution of an instruction, the status will  
turn to "Communicating."  
Communi-  
cation jam  
The communicating is being run. Once the  
communication completes, the status will change  
to either "normal end" or "abnormal end."  
Communi-  
cating  
When the send instruction has successfully  
completed.  
Normal end  
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
Abnormal end  
(timeout)  
When there is no response from target node.  
The target node cannot be written to.  
Abnormal end  
(error)  
0
11-2  
Chapter 11: SEND/RECEIVE function  
(2) When the module is used (host PC: JW50H/70H/100H)  
F-203  
OPCH  
PORT-  
CH-ST  
D
fileN  
S
F-204  
SEND  
n
PORT : Port number on which the JW-50FL is installed (0 to 7)  
- Setting range of S  
CH  
: Channel number within the specified port number (0 to 3)  
In the PC program, the same port number can be called 4  
times, once for each channel (CH0, CH1, CH2, and CH3).  
: Target node number (01 to FE(H))  
: Data area in the target node PC (file number)  
: Top file address of the data area in the target node PC  
: Number of data bytes transmitted (000 to 377(8), 256 bytes at  
000)  
0000 to 1577  
b0000 to b1777  
09000 to 99777  
E0000 to E1777  
@0000 to @1574  
@b0000 to @b1774  
@09000 to @99774  
@E0000 to @E1774  
ST  
fileN  
D
n
S
: Data area top register of source station data  
Target node  
file N  
This node  
file 0  
CH number within  
the PORT number  
D ->  
S ->  
Send  
n
Response  
Flag  
Flag status during and after the operation  
11  
Non-  
carry  
07354  
Zero Carry Error  
07357 07356 07355  
Description  
No response  
from port  
The value entered for the PORT and the actual  
installed port number may be different.  
0
0
1
0
1
This condition may instantaneously occur while  
other send instruction is being executed.  
However, as soon as the condition becomes clear  
for the execution of an instruction, the status will  
turn to "Communicating."  
Communi-  
cation jam  
0
0
0
The communicating is being run. Once the  
communication completes, the status will change  
to either "normal end" or "abnormal end."  
Communi-  
cating  
1
0
0
1
When the send instruction has successfully  
completed.  
Normal end  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
Abnormal end  
(error)  
The target node cannot be written to.  
11-3  
Chapter 11: SEND/RECEIVE function  
Sample of program (for the JW30H)  
When transferring 8 bytes of data from source station register 1000 to the register 09000 of the  
target station number 3 :  
Local node JW-20FL  
Module No. Switch : 2  
Channel used  
: 0  
00000  
F-44  
F-32  
SET  
Set the sending relay 14000.  
14000  
Switch  
14000  
UN 2, CH0, target node number 3,  
File number 0  
File address 001000  
F-203  
OPCH  
2-0-03  
010  
0
004000  
F-204  
SEND  
1000  
Transfers 8 bytes of the range  
1000 to 1007.  
07354 07355 07356  
07357  
14000  
Detects non-execution at power ON.  
(Flags do not change for one second.)  
TMR  
000  
0010  
Non-carry  
Carry  
Zero  
Error  
F-44  
T000  
07355  
F-33  
RST  
14000  
Resets 14000 when the execution  
completes.  
Error  
07356  
Carry  
Note  
- The entry condition of F-203/204 instruction needs to be kept ON until the execution of the instruc-  
tion completes (or until any error occurs or the carry flags turns ON). If the entry condition turns  
OFF while the instruction is being run, the instruction will end in an incomplete condition. Once this  
condition occurs, a "communication jam" occurs when an instruction execution is attempted the  
next time, and the instruction will not run properly. To restore the condition, power OFF the PC,  
and turn it ON again.  
11  
- If the entry condition turns OFF, due to an instantaneous power failure, turn the entry condition to  
"latched relay" as a remedy. If, however, any power loss occurs while an instruction is being run  
using "latched relay," turning the power ON again will cause F-203/204 instructions process being  
run to disappear, and the entry condition will stay ON. Therefore, the start of the entry may not be  
detected. Since, in this case, all flags will be turned OFF, detect the continuation of the OFF  
condition of all flags using the timer, and then reset the entry condition before running the next  
instruction.  
11-4  
Chapter 11: SEND/RECEIVE function  
[2] RECEIVE  
This function operates by the combination of F-203 (OPCH) and F-205 (RCV).  
(1) When the module is used (host PC: JW30H, J-board (Z-500 series))  
F-203  
OPCH  
UN-  
CH-ST  
S
fileN  
D
F-204  
SEND  
n
- Setting range of D  
0000 to 1577  
UN  
CH  
: Module No. switch set value (0 to 6) of the communication  
module  
: Channel number within the specified module (board) (0 to 3).  
In the PC program, the same port number can be called 4  
times, once for each channel (CH0, CH1, CH2, and CH3).  
: Target node number (01 to FE(H))  
: Data area in the target node PC (file number)  
: Top file address of the data area in the target node PC  
: Number of data bytes transmitted (000 to 377(8), 256 bytes at  
000)  
2000 to 7577  
b0000 to b1777  
b2000 to b3777  
09000 to 99777  
E0000 to E7777  
File1 000000 to 037777  
@0000 to @1574  
@2000 to @7574  
@b0000 to @b1774  
@b2000 to @b3774  
@09000 to @99774  
@E0000 to @E7774  
File1 @000000 to @037774  
ST  
fileN  
S
n
D
: Data area top register of source station data  
This node  
Setting target node  
Target node  
CH number  
file N  
file 0  
corresponding to  
the UN number  
S →  
D →  
Send  
n
Response  
Flag  
11  
Flag status during and after the operation  
Non-  
carry  
07354  
Zero Carry Error  
07357 07356 07355  
Description  
No response  
from the module  
(board)  
Set value on the UN and module No. switch set  
value of the communication module are different.  
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
This condition may instantaneously occur while  
other receive instruction is being executed.  
However, as soon as the condition becomes clear  
for the execution of an instruction, the status will  
turn to "Communicating."  
Communi-  
cation jam  
The communicating is being run. Once the  
communication completes, the status will change  
to either "normal end" or "abnormal end."  
Communi-  
cating  
When the receive instruction has successfully  
completed.  
Normal end  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
Abnormal end  
(timeout)  
When there is no response from target node.  
11-5  
Chapter 11: SEND/RECEIVE function  
(2) When the module is used (host PC: JW50H/70H/100H)  
F-203  
OPCH  
PORT-  
CH-ST  
S
fileN  
D
F-204  
SEND  
n
PORT : Port number on which the JW-50FL is installed (0 to 7)  
CH  
: Channel number within the specified port number (0 to 3)  
In the PC program, the same port number can be called 4  
times, once for each channel (CH0, CH1, CH2, and CH3).  
: Target node number (01 to FE(H))  
: Data area in the target node PC (file number)  
: Top file address of the data area in the target node PC  
: Data area top register of source station data  
: Number of data bytes transmitted (000 to 377(8), 256 bytes at  
000)  
- Setting range of D  
ST  
fileN  
D
S
n
0000 to 1577  
b0000 to b1777  
09000 to 99777  
E0000 to E1777  
@0000 to @1574  
@b0000 to @b1774  
@09000 to @99774  
@E0000 to @E1774  
D
: Top file address of the data area in the target node PC  
Target node  
file N  
This node  
file 0  
CH number within  
the PORT number  
S ->  
D ->  
Send  
n
Response  
Flag  
11  
Flag status during and after the operation  
Non-  
carry  
07354  
Zero Carry Error  
07357 07356 07355  
Description  
No response  
from port  
The value entered for the PORT and the actual  
installed port number may be different.  
0
0
1
0
This condition may instantaneously occur while  
other send instruction is being executed.  
However, as soon as the condition becomes clear  
for the execution of an instruction, the status will  
turn to "Communicating."  
Communi-  
cation jam  
0
0
0
1
The communicating is being run. Once the  
communication completes, the status will change  
to either "normal end" or "abnormal end."  
Communi-  
cating  
1
0
0
1
When the send instruction has successfully  
completed.  
Normal end  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
Abnormal end  
(error)  
The target node cannot be written to.  
11-6  
Chapter 11: SEND/RECEIVE function  
Sample of program (for the JW30H)  
When transferring 8 bytes of data from source station register 1000 to the register 09000 of the  
target station number 3 :  
Local node JW-20FL  
Module No. Switch : 2  
Channel used  
: 0  
00000  
F-44  
F-32  
14000  
SET  
Set the sending relay 14000.  
Switch  
14000  
UN 2, CH0, target node number 3,  
File number 0  
File address 001000  
F-203  
2-0-03  
OPCH  
0
001000  
F-205  
010  
09000  
Transfers 8 bytes of the range  
09000 to 09007.  
SEND  
07354 07355 07356  
07357  
Zero  
14000  
Detects non-execution at power ON.  
(Flags do not change for one second.)  
TMR  
000  
0010  
Non-carry  
Carry  
Error  
F-44  
T000  
07355  
F-33  
RST  
14000  
Resets 14000 when the execution  
completes.  
Error  
07356  
Carry  
Note  
- The entry condition of F-203/205 instruction needs to be kept ON until the execution of the instruc-  
tion completes (or until any error occurs or the carry flags turns ON). If the entry condition turns  
OFF while the instruction is being run, the instruction will end in an incomplete condition. Once this  
condition occurs, a "communication jam" occurs when an instruction execution is attempted the  
next time, and the instruction will not run properly. To restore the condition, power OFF the PC,  
and turn it ON again.  
11  
- If the entry condition turns OFF, due to an instantaneous power failure, turn the entry condition to  
"latched relay" as a remedy. If, however, any power loss occurs while an instruction is being run  
using "latched relay," turning the power ON again will cause F-203/205 instructions process being  
run to disappear, and the entry condition will stay ON. Therefore, the start of the entry may not be  
detected. Since, in this case, all flags will be turned OFF, detect the continuation of the OFF  
condition of all flags using the timer, and then reset the entry condition before running the next  
instruction.  
11-7  
Chapter 11: SEND/RECEIVE function  
11-2 Timeout time for SEND/RECEIVE instructions  
Enter a timeout time for the SEND/RECEIVE functions in the parameter at address 60(8).  
Timeout time parameter  
Address(8)  
Detail  
60  
Timeout time for SEND/RECEIVE instructions (0.1 to 25.5 sec.)  
- The specified timeout time will be effective for all target nodes.  
- The allowable range is 0.01 (0.1 sec.) to 255 (25.5 sec.), in decimal notation. (In units of 0.1 sec.)  
- The default value of 00(H) is 1 sec.  
11  
11-8  
Chapter 12: Parameters  
This chapter describes the parameters that can be set in the module. The parameter area is set in the  
control module (CPU board). "12-3 How to set parameters."  
12-1 Table of parameters  
Reference  
page  
Address(8)  
Details  
00  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
IP address  
When FF(H) is written to address 03, the module will  
enter the data memory setting mode.  
7-5  
7-8  
IP address  
- Enter the parameter file address at addresses  
00 and 01. Enter the file number at address 02.  
12-3  
15-13  
IP address  
IP address, node number  
Token monitor timing => See next page  
Interval between frames (normally set to 0)  
8-13  
15-22  
-
06 to 07 Reserved area  
10  
Data transmission Area 1 top address (word address) for this node.  
- Address 10 is for the lower digit. Address 11 is for the upper digit.  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
30  
31  
32  
Data length (word) of Area 1 for this node.  
- Address 12 is for the lower digit. Address 13 is for the upper digit.  
Data transmission Area 2 top address (word address) for this node.  
- Address 14 is for the lower digit. Address 15 is for the upper digit.  
Data length (word) of Area 2 for this node.  
- Address 16 is for the lower digit. Address 17 is for the upper digit.  
Related to  
cyclic  
Chapter 8  
transfers  
Top address of Area 1 on the PC (word address)  
- Address 20 is for the lower digit. Address 21 is for the upper digit.  
Area 1 file number on the PC  
Reserved area  
Top address of Area 2 on the PC (word address)  
- Address 24 is for the lower digit. Address 25 is for the upper digit.  
Area 2 file number on the PC  
Reserved area  
-
Top address of the communication control area on the PC (word  
address)  
- Address 30 is for the lower digit. Address 31 is for the upper digit.  
Communication control area's file number on the PC  
12  
Related to  
communi-  
cation  
Communication control area transfer type  
- Specify the address to transfer from the module to the control  
module (CPU board)  
Chapter 10  
control  
00(H): Transfer all of the area  
33  
80(H): Does not transfer data from the communication transfer area.  
81(H): Transfer only the participating node list flag, operation status  
flag, and error status flag.  
83(H): Transfer all of the area.  
34  
35  
36  
37  
Transmission buffer top address (word address)  
- Address 34 is for the lower digit. Address 35 is for the upper digit.  
Related to  
message  
transfer  
Chapter 9  
Transmission buffer file number  
Enable/disable use of the transmission buffer => See next page  
40 to 51 Node name (10 ASCII characters)  
52 to 57 Reserved area  
-
-
11-8  
-
60  
Timeout time for the SEND/RECEIVE instruction (0.1 to 25.5 sec.).  
61 to 76 Reserved area  
Start switch  
8-3  
9-2  
77  
- When the value of this switch changes from 00 to 01(H), the parameters  
settings are transferred to the module.  
- Do not write data in the reserved areas (5 locations).  
When the JW-50FL is used, set the parameters in system memory.  
See pages 12-4 to 12-5.  
12-1  
Chapter 12: Parameters  
12-2 Details of each of the parameters  
(1) Enable/disable the use of the transmission buffer (Setting parameter address 37(8))  
Select whether to enable/disable the buffer for each message by entering the appropriate value at  
parameter address 37(8).  
Selection of  
transmission buffer  
Message  
*
80(H) 81(H) 82(H) 83(H)  
Message other than transmission  
Messages other than SHARP's proprietary  
×
×
message format  
Transmission  
message  
Computer link function  
Remote function  
SHARP's  
proprietary format  
×
×
(Transmission buffer... : Used, × : Not used)  
* 80 to 83(H) are the valid values for parameter address 37(8).  
Relationship between messages and transaction codes.  
Use selection of  
transmission type buffer  
Message  
Transaction code (TCD)  
80(H)  
81(H)  
82(H)  
83(H)  
*
Messages  
other than  
transmission  
60000 to 65202 (request)  
X
X
X
X
65203 to 65215 (response)  
0 to 999  
X
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
1000 (request computer link function: SHARP's  
proprietary function)  
X
X
O
O
1001 (request remote function: SHARP's proprietary  
function)  
X
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Transmission  
messages  
1002 to 1199  
1200 (response of computer link function: SHARP's  
proprietary function)  
1201 (response of remote function: SHARP's  
proprietary function)  
X
X
O
O
O
O
12  
1202 to 59999  
O
O
(Transmission buffer... : Used, × : Not used)  
(2) Token monitor time (parameter address 04(8))  
Set the token monitor time as follows, based on the number of bytes being sent by this station.  
- 0 to 5K bytes: 10 ms  
- 5K to 10K bytes: 30 ms  
- 10K bytes or more: 40 ms  
12-2  
Chapter 12: Parameters  
12-3 How to set parameters  
[1] When the JW-20FL5/20FLT or Z-366J is used  
Set parameters of JW-20FL5/20FLT and Z-336J as optional parameters of the control module (CPU  
board). Determine the area of the optional parameters using the module No. switch set value of JW-  
20FL5/20FLT and Z-336J. The parameters occupy 64 bytes per module.  
- Relationship between the host PC and the con-  
trol module  
FL-net module Host PC Control module  
Module No. switch  
setting value  
Parameter address(H)  
JW20H  
JW30H  
JW-21CU/22CU  
JW-31CUH1  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
00 to 77  
00 to 77  
00 to 77  
00 to 77  
00 to 77  
00 to 77  
00 to 77  
JW-20FL5  
JW-20FLT  
JW-32CUH1  
JW-33CUH1/2/3  
FL-net  
board  
Host J-board  
CPU board  
Z-300 series Z-311J/312J/313J  
Z-500 series Z-511J  
Z-336J  
Note: Do not set switch SW3 outside the  
range of 0 to 6.  
How to set the parameters using the JW-14PG  
(The modules shown below  
are installation examples)  
This paragraph describes param-  
eter setting procedures (in system  
memory) using the hand-held pro-  
grammer JW-14PG.  
1Connect the JW-14PG to the  
PG port on the control module  
(CPU board.)  
2Set the PC to program mode.  
JW-14PG  
JW-20FL5  
Control module (JW-33CUH)  
Connection cable  
(JW-22KC/24KC)  
3Set to the initial mode (parameter setting).  
JW-14PG screen  
4Select the option parameter and enter "2" for the module  
I
Parameter  
12  
No. switch number.  
0) I/O  
1) Option  
5Rewrite start switch to 00(H).  
I
Parameter 0 - SW: 2  
Reading parameter address 77(8).  
75  
76  
HEX  
HEX  
00  
00  
Reading a prameter address(H)  
I
Parameter 0 - SW: 2  
>77  
HEX  
00  
6Enter IP address (192.168.250.3) for the parameter address 00 to 03(8).  
Decimal notation of parameter 00.  
01  
DCM  
DCM  
168  
250  
Decimal display of the setting  
02  
of parameter 00  
I
Parameter  
>03  
DCM  
003  
Same as the above, enter the other parameter addresses.  
12-3  
Chapter 12: Parameters  
[2] When the JW-50FL is used  
Set the parameters for the JW-50FL in the system memory of the control module. Select the  
parameter (system memory) area using the SW3 switch on the JW-50FL.  
(Details  
See the next page. Switch SW3  
See page 4-4.)  
2
Switch SW3 setting  
0
1
3
4
Parameter address(8)  
(system memory)  
#0300 to  
#0377  
#1400 to  
#1477  
#1500 to  
#1577  
#1600 to  
#1677  
#1700 to  
#1777  
Note: Do not set switch SW3 outside the range of 0 to 4.  
- Relationship between the host PC and the control module  
FL-net module  
Host PC  
JW50H  
JW70H  
Control module  
JW-50CUH  
JW-70CUH  
JW-50FL  
JW100H  
JW-100CUH  
- How to set the parameters using the JW-14PG  
This paragraph describes param-  
eter setting procedures (in system  
memory) using the handheld JW-  
14PG programmer.  
(The modules shown below  
are installation examples)  
1Connect the JW-14PG to the  
support tool connector on the  
control module.  
JW-14PG  
2Set the PC to program mode.  
JW-50FL  
Control module (JW-100CUH)  
Connection cable  
(ZW-3KC)  
3Set a start switch to 00(H).  
Read parameter  
JW-14PG screen  
address 77(8) (system  
memory #0377 *).  
* When switch SW3 is  
set to 0.  
#0375 HEX  
#0376 HEX  
System  
00  
00  
P
12  
>#0377 HEX  
00  
4Enter the IP address (192.168.250.3) at parameter addresses 00 to 03(8).  
Decimal display of the setting  
#0301 DCM  
#0302 DCM  
168  
250  
P
System  
>#0303 DCM  
003  
Same as the above, enter the other parameter addresses.  
12-4  
Chapter 12: Parameters  
- Parameter addresses on the JW-50FL  
Depending on the setting of switch SW3 on the JW-50FL, the addresses of the parameters (in system  
memory) will vary, as shown below. In this manual, the parameter addresses in the left column of the  
tables are expressed in their common form.  
Set value for switch SW3  
Parameter  
address(8)  
Details of parameter  
(Details - See page 12-1)  
0
1
2
3
4
00  
01  
02  
03  
04  
#0300 #1400 #1500 #1600 #1700 IP address  
#0301 #1401 #1501 #1601 #1701 IP address  
#0302 #1402 #1502 #1602 #1702 IP address  
#0303 #1403 #1503 #1603 #1703 IP address, node number  
#0304 #1404 #1504 #1604 #1704 Token monitor time (normally set to 10 ms)  
05  
#0305 #1405 #1505 #1605 #1705 Minimum frame interval (normally set to 0)  
#0306 #1406 #1506 #1606 #1706  
06  
to  
to  
to  
to  
to  
to  
Reserved area  
07  
#0307 #1407 #1507 #1607 #1707  
#0310 #1410 #1510 #1610 #1710  
#0311 #1411 #1511 #1611 #1711  
#0312 #1412 #1512 #1612 #1712  
#0313 #1413 #1513 #1613 #1713  
#0314 #1414 #1514 #1614 #1714  
#0315 #1415 #1515 #1615 #1715  
#0316 #1416 #1516 #1616 #1716  
#0317 #1417 #1517 #1617 #1717  
#0320 #1420 #1520 #1620 #1720  
#0321 #1421 #1521 #1621 #1721  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
30  
31  
Sending area top address of area 1 for  
local node (Word address)  
Sending data length (word) of area 1 for  
local node area 1  
Sending area top address of area 2 for the  
local node (Word address)  
Sending data length (word) of area 2 for  
local node  
Top address (word address) of area 1 on  
PC  
#0322 #1422 #1522 #1622 #1722 File number of area 1 on PC  
#0323 #1423 #1523 #1623 #1723 Reserved area  
#0324 #1424 #1524 #1624 #1724  
#0325 #1425 #1525 #1625 #1725  
Top address (word address) of area 2 on  
PC  
#0326 #1426 #1526 #1626 #1726 File number of area 2 on PC  
#0327 #1427 #1527 #1627 #1727 Reserved area  
#0330 #1430 #1530 #1630 #1730  
#0331 #1431 #1531 #1631 #1731  
Top address of communication control area  
(word address) on PC  
12  
File number of communication control area  
on PC  
32  
33  
#0332 #1432 #1532 #1632 #1732  
#0333 #1433 #1533 #1633 #1733  
Transmission type of communication control  
area  
33  
35  
36  
37  
#0334 #1434 #1534 #1634 #1734  
#0335 #1435 #1535 #1635 #1735  
Top address of transmission buffer (word  
address)  
#0336 #1436 #1536 #1636 #1736 File number of transmission buffer  
#0337 #1437 #1537 #1637 #1737 Use selection of transmission buffer  
#0340 #1440 #1540 #1640 #1740  
40  
to  
to  
to  
to  
to  
to  
Node name (ASCII 10 characters)  
51  
#0351 #1451 #1551 #1651 #1751  
52  
to  
#0352 #1452 #1552 #1652 #1752  
to  
to  
to  
to  
to  
Reserved area  
57  
#0357 #1457 #1557 #1657 #1757  
60  
#0360 #1460 #1560 #1660 #1760 SEND/RECEIVE instruction timeout time  
#0361 #1461 #1561 #1661 #1761  
61  
to  
to  
to  
to  
to  
to  
Reserved area  
76  
#0376 #1476 #1576 #1676 #1776  
77  
#0377 #1477 #1577 #1677 #1777 Start switch  
12-5  
Chapter 13: Troubleshooting  
13-1 Before you conclude that the machine is faulty  
Check item  
Description  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Check whether the modules and boards are installed properly.  
Are the switches on the module and boards set properly?  
Check whether the network IP addresses are set properly.  
Are the common memory areas set properly?  
Check for loose connections on modules and boards.  
Make sure the cables are connected properly.  
Are termination resistors installed on the 10BASE5 cables?  
Are the ground terminals on the 10BASE5 cables connected?  
Was a cross cable used instead of a 10BASE-T cable?  
10 Was a category 5 cable used instead of 10BASE-T cable?  
11 Is power supplied to the Ethernet hubs and repeaters?  
13  
13-1  
Chapter 13: Troubleshooting  
13-2 General network problems and countermeasures  
[1] Problems concerning the network and appropriate countermeasures (when  
unable to communicate)  
Symptom  
Check points  
Check details  
Countermeasure  
Is the indicator on the power supply lit?  
Whether main power lamps of  
communication modules are lit?  
Is the main power lamp on the AUI power  
supply modules lit?  
Check and reconnect  
the power cable. Check  
the voltage.  
Power source  
Is the power output by AUI power supply  
module within the specified range (12 V)?  
Are the power lamps on the hubs lit?  
Are power cables from the AUI properly  
connected to the equipment?  
Are there loose parts in the transceiver  
installation area?  
Reinstall according to  
section 15-6.  
Adjust until they are  
Check for abnormalities using transceiver normal. If errors occur  
Connection  
between the  
communicati-  
on cable and  
the  
installation checking devices.  
continuously, install the  
unit in another location.  
Reinstall according to  
section 15-6  
Are the transceivers properly insulated?  
transceiver  
Unable to  
communicate  
Were the transceivers properly installed to  
the communication cable at its marker  
section?  
Reinstall according to  
section 15-6  
Are there loose parts in the transceiver  
installation area?  
Reinstall according to  
section 15-6  
See the installation  
manual of the  
checker(s)  
Check for abnormalities using transceiver  
installation checking devices.  
Connection  
between the  
transceiver  
cable and  
Lock them properly  
according to section 15-  
6
Are the transceivers locked properly?  
Are the transceiver LEDs lit normally?  
transceiver  
Check and reconnect  
the power cable and  
check the voltage  
13  
Are there loose parts in the transceiver  
installation area?  
Reinstall according to  
section 15-6  
Connection  
between the  
transceiver  
cable and  
Are the SD (sending) and RD (receive)  
LEDs lit normally?  
Check the error detail  
according to Chapter 13  
Make sure the media select switches (SQE Reset according to  
etc.) are set properly. section 15-6  
equipment  
13-2  
Chapter 13: Troubleshooting  
[2] Problems concerning the network and appropriate countermeasures (when  
communications are unstable)  
Symptom  
Check points  
Check details  
Countermeasures  
Make sure the external conductive  
shields of all the coaxial cables are  
connected to ground at one point  
Ground properly, according  
to section 15-6.  
Are the shield wires of the AUI  
cables properly connected to  
ground?  
Ground according to the  
manufacturer's instruction  
manuals  
Check the power and  
cables of any station that  
doesn't respond properly.  
Does each station respond properly  
to a Ping command?  
Check the contacts in  
cables and connectors.  
Check for abnormalities  
using an analyzer.  
Is the collision lamp lit frequently?  
Communication  
route  
Are repeaters used in less than 4  
layers  
Is each segment within the  
maximum length?  
Are termination resistors installed at  
both ends?  
Review the configuration  
according to section 15-6.  
Is the number of devices connected  
in each segment within the specified  
range?  
Unable to  
communicate,  
or unstable  
Are 3 or fewer segments used to  
connect the equipment?  
communication  
Check the power supply  
Is power to the repeaters turned on? and power cable, as well  
as the voltage.  
Check the IP addresses  
Are the IP addresses for the network  
and support tools using an  
set properly?  
analyzer.  
Check the IP addresses  
Are the station numbers of the  
and support tools using an  
equipment set properly?  
analyzer.  
Check the equipment  
Participating  
stations  
equipment  
settings  
Are the equipment parameters set  
parameters using support  
properly?  
13  
tools.  
Are the CD (carrier detection)  
indicators lit consecutively or  
intermittently?  
Check the communication  
cables, and the AUI power  
supply.  
Are the SD (send) indicators lit  
consecutively or intermittently?  
Re-check the equipment  
settings.  
Are the LK (link) indicators lit  
consecutively?  
Re-check the equipment  
parameter settings  
13-3  
Chapter 13: Troubleshooting  
[3] How to check an IP address using the Ping function on a personal computer  
Even without specialized tools, such as the FL-net network analyzer, you can check the connections  
and IP addresses of FL-net equipment using an ordinary personal computer running Windows95 etc.  
The method for using the Ping function is described below.  
When an IP connection is made, check the connection using the Ping  
command.  
(1) Bring up an [MS-DOS] prompt by selecting [Start] -> [Program] on  
Windows95, and then select [MS-DOS prompt] to display an [MS-  
DOS window].  
Microsoft(R)Windows95  
(C)Copyright Microsoft Corp 1981-1996.  
C: ¥WINDOWS>  
(2) Enter a Ping command, and execute a basic communication test  
between the link module and the personal computer. To send a Ping  
command, type Ping [IP address] or Ping [host name].  
<Ex.: using an IP address> Ping 192.168.250.13  
If the equipment on the FL-net is set properly, the following  
messages will appear.  
Check the IP  
connection  
using the Ping  
Pinging 192.168.250.13 with 32bytes of data  
Reply from 192.168.250. 13:byte=32 times=2ms TTL=32  
Reply from 192.168.250. 13:byte=32 times=1ms TTL=32  
Reply from 192.168.250. 13:byte=32 times=1ms TTL=32  
C: WINDOWS>  
function  
(3) If the connection is faulty (no connection), the following display (time  
out) will appear.  
Pinging 192.168.250.13 with 32bytes of data:  
Request timed out.  
Request timed out.  
Request timed out.  
Request timed out.  
C: ¥WINDOWS>  
13  
13-4  
Chapter 13: Troubleshooting  
13-3 General precautions related to the FL-net  
For details about the FL-net transfer route standards, see the previous section and IEEE802.3. In addi-  
tion, the following limitations and precautions should be noted.  
Description  
Do not place communication data from other Ethernet devices on the FL-net communication  
cables.  
1
2
3
4
Do not connect the FL-net to a router.  
Switching hubs cannot be used on the FL-net.  
Using IR communications or other wireless media may reduce the communication speed.  
When a personal computer is used, the communication speed may be affected by the amount  
of memory, the OS used, and other applications running on the personal computer.  
5
Use the specified IP addresses.  
Network addresses should be used (the standard network address is 192.168.250.) The IP  
address node numbers (station numbers) should be within the allowable input range.  
Be careful not to use the same node number  
6
Network address  
192.168.250  
Node number  
twice because the node numbers are not  
checked during the initialization check.  
They will be checked when communication  
starts.  
1 to 249  
7
8
9
Connect the ground securely. Use ground lines that are large enough.  
Separate the communication lines from any noise generating sources. Do not lay  
communication lines parallel to power lines.  
When executing both cyclic data communications and message data communications at the  
same time, the communication speed may drop due to the volume of data.  
10  
11  
12  
Areas (common memory areas) for cyclic data communications are not required to be  
adjacent to each other.  
When an SQE switch is installed on a transceiver, make sure it is properly installed according  
to the instruction manual.  
Depending on the processing capacity of the connected devices, the minimum time for  
communication throughout the system may be affected. Set the communication processing  
13 speed for the device with the slowest communication capacity (calculated from the minimum  
allowable time between frames). Note that adding a single device may drop the  
communication speed of the whole system significantly.  
The header section of message data communications is big endian, and the data section is  
14 little endian. However, the system parameters, that is data section at reading profile, is big  
endian. (Big endian is a method in which the MSB is sent first.)  
13  
13-5  
Chapter 13: Troubleshooting  
13-4 Error indicators on the display panel  
If an error occurs while communicating with the module, the error details can be checked by reading  
the error code on the display panel (LED display) of the module. Find the cause of the error by looking  
up the error code that is displayed. Then take the appropriate countermeasures (resetting the param-  
S0  
S1  
S2  
eters, etc.)  
S3  
S4  
JW-50FL  
LNK  
S0  
S1  
S2  
S3  
S4  
S5  
S6  
S7  
S5  
S6  
S7  
HE  
PE  
T
TX  
RX  
DC12V  
-
JW 20FLT  
JW-20FL5  
TEST  
PER  
LN TX RX 12V  
T
PE HE  
LN TX RX 12V  
T
PE HE  
HER  
12V  
RX  
TX  
LN  
S7 S6 S5 S4 S3 S2 S1 S0  
S7 S6 S5 S4 S3 S2 S1 S0  
(JW-20FL5)  
(JW-20FLT)  
(JW-50FL)  
(Z-336J)  
LED symbol  
Details  
JW-20FL5/T  
Z-336J  
JW-50FL  
LN  
LNK  
TX  
Lit when communicating normally.  
Lit when sending data.  
TX  
RX  
RX  
Lit when receiving data.  
12 V  
T
12 VDC Lit when 12 VDC power is present. (This indicator cannot be used with JW-20FLT.)  
TEST Lights while in the test mode. (Is normally OFF.)  
PE  
PER  
HER  
Lights when the parameter settings are abnormal.  
Lights when the module has an error.  
HE  
S0 to S7  
S0 to S7 Displays the node number when it is normal, and an error code when an error occurs.  
Error code of LED (S0 to S7)  
LED name  
Error  
code(H)  
Error item  
Cause (parameter setting status)  
S7 S6 S5 S4 S3 S2 S1 S0  
Node number is outside the range of 1  
to 254.  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
01  
02  
04  
Node number  
O
O
Token monitor time The token monitor time is 0.  
Not available CU  
The host PC is a W70H/100H.  
(Only the JW-50FL.)  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
08  
09  
0A  
0B  
Area 1 address  
Area 1 size  
Area 1 is outside the allowed range.  
Area 1 is larger than 8K bits.  
13  
Area 2 address  
Area 2 size  
Area 2 is outside the allowed range.  
Area 2 is larger than 8K words.  
*
The top address of area 1 is outside  
the allowed range.  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
0E  
0F  
10  
11  
Area 1 PC address  
Area 2 PC address  
O
O
O
The top address of area 2 is outside  
the allowed range.  
Doubled node  
number  
The same node number was assigned  
to more than one node.  
Doubled common  
memory address  
This node's transmission area 1 (or  
2) is used by another node.  
O
O
O
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
20  
21  
22  
Range of area 1  
Range of area 2  
*
When the JW20H and J-board (Z-300  
series) is used for a PC, any area is set  
for file 1 though there is no file 1.  
Range of each table  
Rang e of the  
transmission buffer.  
O
O
O
O
O
23  
: Light, : Light off  
* Related to the cyclic transfer  
13-6  
Chapter 14: Specifications  
14-1 JW-20FL5/20FLT  
[1] General specifications  
Specifications  
Item  
JW-20FL5  
JW-20FLT  
PC models to use  
JW20H/30H  
Storage temperature  
-20 to +70˚ C  
Ambient operating  
temperature  
0 to +55˚ C  
Ambient humidity  
Vibration resistance  
Impact resistance  
35 to 90% RH (without condensing)  
Equivalent to JIS C 0911: Vibration test: width 0.15 mm (10 to 58 Hz),  
9.8 m/s2 (58 to 150 Hz), (2 hours each on the X, Y, Z axes)  
Equivalent to JIS C 0912: 98 m/s2 (3 each on the X, Y, Z axes)  
Internal current consumption  
(5 VDC)  
350 mA  
External supply power  
12 VDC ±5%, 0.5 A  
No  
10BASE-T  
(RJ-45 connector)  
Ethernet interface  
AUI for 10BASE5 (D-sub 15-pin)  
Programmer interface  
Weight  
D-sub 15-pin  
Approx. 215 g  
D-sub 15-pin  
Approx. 185 g  
Accessory  
One cable, one instruction manual  
One instruction manual  
[2] Communication specifications  
(1) Communication section specifications  
Specifications  
Item  
JW-20FL5  
JW-20FLT  
10BASE-T  
Star  
Network compatibility  
Physical topology  
Transfer media  
10BASE5  
Bus  
50 ohm yellow cable  
10BASE-T twisted pair cable  
Maximum data transmission  
length between stations  
500 m/segment, 2.5 km/network *1 100 m/segment, 500 m/network *2  
Transfer speed  
Transfer system  
10M bps  
Base band  
Protocol configuration  
Application  
Transport  
Network  
Data link  
FA link protocol  
UDP  
IP  
Ethernet V2  
14  
*1: Maximum transfer distance between stations when connecting more than one segment using re-  
peaters.  
*2: Maximum transfer distance between stations when connecting more than one 10BASE-T segment  
using hubs.  
(2) FL-net specifications  
Item  
Specifications  
Master-less token method  
Communication control method  
Number of stations supported  
Maximum 254  
Cyclic transfer (n: n, 8K bits + 8K words)  
Message transfer (1: 1, 1: n)  
Communication function  
Maximum data length of one frame is 1K bytes  
14-1  
Chapter 14: Specifications  
[3] External dimension drawings  
JW-20FL5  
-
JW 20FL5  
LN TX RX 12V  
TPEHE  
S7 S6 S5 S4 S3 S2 S1 S0  
Basic rack panel  
(Unit: mm)  
ON  
S
H
I
E
L
D
OFF  
FG  
RESET  
6
110  
116  
35  
JW-20FLT  
-
JW 20FLT  
LN TX RX 12V  
T PE HE  
S7 S6 S5 S4 S3 S2 S1 S0  
Basic rack panel  
(Unit: mm)  
S
H
I
E
L
D
ON  
OFF  
10B-T  
14  
RESET  
6
110  
116  
35  
14-2  
Chapter 14: Specifications  
14-2 Z-336J  
[1] General specifications  
Item  
PC models to use  
Storage temperature  
Specifications  
J-board  
-20 to +70˚ C  
Ambient operating  
temperature  
0 to +55˚ C  
Ambient humidity  
Vibration resistance  
Impact resistance  
35 to 90% RH (without condensing)  
Equivalent to JIS C 0911: Vibration test: width 0.15 mm (10 to 58  
Hz), 9.8 m/s2 (58 to 150 Hz), (2 hours each on the X, Y, Z axes)  
Equivalent to JIS C 0912: 98 m/s2 (3 each on the X, Y, Z axes)  
Internal current consumption  
(5 VDC)  
380 mA  
External supply power  
12 VDC ±5%, 0.5 A  
AUI for 10BASE5 (D-sub 15-pin)  
10BASE-T (RJ-45 connector)  
Ethernet interface  
Programmer interface  
D-sub 15-pin  
Maximum number of modules Z-300 series: Max. two (Z-311J/312J), max. one set (Z-313J)  
available to mount  
Z-500 series: Max. 2 sets  
Weight  
Approx. 180 g  
Cable 1  
Boss for securing between boards (20 mm + 6 mm protrusion) 4  
Screws (Semuth type M3 x 6 mm) 4  
Accessory  
Instruction manual 1  
[2] Communication specifications  
(1) Communication section specifications  
Item  
Specifications  
Network compatibility  
Transfer speed  
Either one of 10BASE5 or 10BASE-T  
10M bps  
Physical topology  
Transfer media  
Bus (10BASE5) / Star (10BASE-T)  
50 ohm yellow cable (10BASE5) / twisted pair cable (10BASE-T)  
Base band  
Transfer system  
10BASE5: 500 m/segment, 2.5 km/network *1  
10BASE-T: 100 m/segment, 500 m/network *2  
Maximum station  
Protocol configuration  
Application  
Transport  
FA link protocol  
UDP  
Network  
IP  
Data link  
Ethernet V2  
14  
*1: Maximum transfer distance between stations when connecting more than one segment using re-  
peaters.  
*2: Maximum transfer distance between stations when connecting more than one 10BASE-T segment  
using hubs.  
(2) FL-net specifications  
Item  
Specifications  
Master-less token method  
Communication control method  
Number of stations supported  
Maximum 254  
Cyclic transfer (n: n, 8K bits + 8K words)  
Message transfer (1: 1, 1: n)  
Communication function  
Maximum data length of one frame is 1K bytes  
[3] External dimension drawings  
See page 5-2.  
14-3  
Chapter 14: Specifications  
14-3 JW-50FL  
[1] General specifications  
Item  
Specifications  
Install in optional slots on the JW50/70H/100H (max. 5 units) *1  
-20 to +70˚ C  
Host PC  
Storage temperature  
Ambient operating  
temperature  
0 to +55˚ C  
Ambient humidity  
Vibration resistance  
Impact resistance  
35 to 90% RH (without condensing)  
Equivalent to JIS C 0911: Vibration test: width 0.15 mm (10 to 58  
Hz), 9.8 m/s2 (58 to 150 Hz), (2 hours each on the X, Y, Z axes)  
Equivalent to JIS C 0912: 98 m/s2 (3 each on the X, Y, Z axes)  
Internal current consumption  
(5 VDC)  
400 mA  
External supply power  
12 VDC ±5%, 0.5 A (only needed for 10BASE5 systems)  
AUI for 10BASE5 (D-sub 15-pin)  
10BASE-T (RJ-45 connector)  
Ethernet interface  
Programmer interface  
Weight  
D-sub 25-pin  
Approx. 380 g  
Accessory  
One cable, one instruction manual  
*1: The JW-50FL cannot be installed on a W70H/100H.  
[2] Communication specifications  
(1) Communication section specifications  
Item  
Specifications  
Network compatibility  
Transfer speed  
10BASE5 or 10BASE-T  
10M bps  
Physical topology  
Transfer media  
Bus (10BASE5) / Star (10BASE-T)  
50 ohm yellow cable (10BASE5), twisted pair cable (10BASE-T)  
Base band  
Transfer system  
10BASE5: 500 m/segment, 2.5 km/network *2  
10BASE-T: 100 m/segment, 500 m/network *3  
Maximum transfer distance  
Protocol configuration  
Application  
Transport  
FA link protocol  
UDP  
Network  
Data link  
IP  
14  
Ethernet V2  
*2: Maximum transfer distance between stations when connecting more than one segment using re-  
peaters.  
*3: Maximum transfer distance between stations when connecting more than one 10BASE-T segment  
using hubs.  
14-4  
Chapter 14: Specifications  
(2) FL-net specifications  
Item  
Specifications  
Master-less token method  
Maximum 254  
Communication control method  
Number of stations supported  
Cyclic transfer (n: n, 8K bits + 8K words)  
Message transfer (1: 1, 1: n)  
Communication function  
Maximum data length of one frame is 1K bytes  
[3] External dimension drawings  
JW-50FL  
LNK  
S0  
S1  
S2  
S3  
S4  
S5  
S6  
S7  
TX  
RX  
DC12V  
TEST  
PER  
HER  
Basic rack panel  
(Unit: mm)  
P
R
O
G
R
A
M
M
E
R
10B5  
10B-T  
12VIN  
()  
()  
FG  
RESET  
33.5  
6
5
105  
116  
14  
14-5  
Chapter 15: Appendix  
15-1 System configuration guide  
[1] Brief description of the Ethernet  
Ethernet is a standardized LAN (Local Area Network) arrangement used to communicate between  
personal computers and printers. It prescribes the communication data format, cables and connectors  
to use. The Ethernet standards are established by the Ethernet working group: IEEE802.3 of the IEEE.  
Currently standards such as 10BASE5, 10BASE2, and 10BASE-T have been clearly defined. The  
working group is continually examining new standards, such as 1000BASE-T, and others. The trend in  
standards from the IEEE802.3 working group is shown below.  
As of November 1998: Quoted from IEEE web site  
Trends in standardization by the IEEE802.3 working group  
15  
15-1  
Chapter 15: Appendix  
[2] 10BASE5 Specifications  
10BASE5 is a connection method for creating an Ethernet network using a coaxial cable approximately  
10 mm thick (The thick cable is also called the "yellow cable"). The "10" in "10BASE5" refers to a data  
transfer speed of 10Mbps. The word "BASE" means that the data transfer system is a "base band  
system." Finally, the "5" means that the data transfer distance of a trunk is limited to 500 m. In order to  
connect devices such as a personal computer, a transceiver is connected by coaxial cable. The trans-  
ceiver is connected to devices using a transceiver cable (AUI cable). Since the 10BASE5 cable is thick  
and it is not very easy to lay the cables, this system is rarely used for office networks. However, since it  
can transfer data over long distances, this system is well suited for trunk networks.  
The figure below shows a configuration example of a 10BASE5 Ethernet system.  
Coaxial cable  
(maximum cable length: 500 m)  
Termination  
Ground  
terminal  
resistor  
Single port transceiver  
AUI cable  
(maximum cable length: 50 m)  
Multi-port transceiver  
- The maximum total cable  
length of an AUI cable, from  
the coaxial cable end to a  
terminal device using a multi-  
port transceiver, is 50 m.  
- Multi-port transceivers can be  
cascaded up to two layers  
deep.  
Configuration example of a 10BASE5 Ethernet system  
15  
15-2  
Chapter 15: Appendix  
[3] 10BASE-T Specifications  
10BASE-T is a connection method for creating an Ethernet network using twisted pair cables. The "10"  
in "10BASE-T" refers to the data transfer speed of 10Mbps. The word "BASE" means that the data  
transfer system is a "base band system." The "-T" refers to the twisted pair cable that is used to carry  
the data. On a 10BASE-T network, devices such as personal computers are connected using hubs.  
Between devices, hubs must be routed and cannot be connected to each other. (However, a cross  
cable (special cable) can be used to make a direct connection, but this is not common.) The maximum  
length from a hub to any device is 100 m.  
A 10BASE-T system can be constructed easily, since its cables are thin. Each device can be connected  
or disconnected without affecting the network. Therefore, 10BASE-T is well suited for use in office  
networks. The figure below shows a configuration example of a 10BASE-T Ethernet system.  
Hub  
Twisted pair cable [UTP: Category 5]  
(Maximum cable length: 100 m)  
RJ-45 connector  
Configuration example of a 10BASE-T Ethernet system  
15  
15-3  
Chapter 15: Appendix  
[4] Other Ethernet Specifications  
(1) 10BASE2  
10BASE2 is a connection method for creating an Ethernet network using a coaxial cable approxi-  
mately 5 mm thick (This cable is also called a "Thin cable"). The "10" in "10BASE2" refers to a data  
transfer speed of 10Mbps. The word "BASE" means that the data transfer system is a "base band  
system." Finally, the "2" means that the data transfer distance of a trunk is limited to 185 m (approx.  
200 m). In order to connect devices such as a personal computer, a T-branch BNC connector is  
connected to each device, and a coaxial cable comes in on each side of the T. The figure below  
shows a configuration example of a 10BASE2 Ethernet system.  
Coaxial cable [RG58A/U]  
(maximum cable length: 1850 m)  
Branch  
connector  
Termination  
resistor  
A configuration example of a 10BASE2 Ethernet system  
(2) Optical Ethernet Specifications  
Optical Ethernet is a connection method for creating an Ethernet network using an optical fiber cable  
to transfer data. It can be used for distances over 500 m and in systems that must be immune to  
noise. The following standard (IEEE802.3) connection methods are available: 10BASE-FP, 10BASE-  
FB, 10BASE-FL, 10BASE-FX,1000BASE-LX, and 1000BASE-SX. The figure below shows a con-  
figuration example of an optical Ethernet system.  
10BASE5 system  
Optical  
transceiver  
Optical fiber cable  
(maximum cable length: 2 km)  
Optical repeater  
An example of an optical Ethernet configuration  
15  
15-4  
Chapter 15: Appendix  
15-2 Examples of system configurations  
[1] Small scale configuration  
Using a single, multi-port transceiver or hub, you can construct a network system connecting a few  
devices.  
Multi-port transceiver  
AUI cable  
(Maximum cable length: 50 m)  
(a) Using a multi-port transceiver  
Hub  
Twisted pair cable [UTP: Category 5]  
(Maximum cable length: 100 m)  
(b) Using a hub  
Examples of small scale configurations  
15  
15-5  
Chapter 15: Appendix  
[2] Basic configuration  
Connect several multi-port transceivers and hubs to a single coaxial cable, and construct a network of  
dozens of devices.  
Coaxial cable (Maximum cable length: 500 m)  
Termination  
resistor  
Ground  
terminal  
Single port  
transceiver  
AUI cable  
(maximum cable length: 50 m)  
Hub  
Twisted pair cable  
Multi-port transceiver  
[UTP: Category 5]  
(Maximum cable length:  
100 m)  
- Up to four repeaters and hubs  
can be placed between any  
two terminals.  
- A maximum of 50m total cable length  
(using an AUI cable) can be used from  
one end of the coaxial cable to a terminal  
device, using a multi-port transceiver.  
- Multi-port transceivers can be cascaded  
up to two layers deep.  
An example of a basic configuration  
15  
15-6  
Chapter 15: Appendix  
[3] Configuration of a large-scale network  
By connecting several 10BASE5 network segments using repeaters, you can construct a network con-  
sisting of several hundred devices.  
Coaxial cable (Maximum cable length: 500 m)  
AUI cable  
Multi-port  
transceiver  
(maximum cable length: 50 m)  
Repeater  
- A maximum of 50m total cable  
length (using an AUI cable) can  
be used from one end of the  
coaxial cable to a terminal  
device, using a multi-port  
transceiver.  
- Multi-port transceivers can be  
cascaded up to two layers  
deep.  
- Up to four repeaters and hubs  
can be placed between any two  
An example of a large-scale configuration  
15  
15-7  
Chapter 15: Appendix  
[4] Configuration of a long distance distribution system  
When constructing a large-scale network, if the distance between network segments exceeds the limit  
of the 10BASE5 cable (500 m), you can construct a network up to 2 km long by connecting optical  
repeaters between network segments.  
Coaxial cable (Maximum cable length: 500 m)  
AUI cable  
Multi-port  
transceiver  
(maximum cable length: 50  
Optical repeater  
Optical fiber cable  
(maximum cable  
length: 2 km)  
- A maximum of 50m total cable  
length (using an AUI cable) can  
be used from one end of the  
coaxial cable to a terminal device,  
using a multi-port transceiver.  
- Multi-port transceivers can be  
cascaded up to two layers deep.  
- Up to four repeaters and hubs  
can be placed between any two  
terminals.  
An example of a large-scale, long distance distribution  
15  
15-8  
Chapter 15: Appendix  
[5] Configuration of local concentrations  
In a location where several dozen devices are concentrated in close proximity, a network system can be  
constructed using a star coupling hub.  
Hub  
Star coupling hub  
Twisted pair cable  
[UTP: Category 5]  
(Maximum cable  
length 100 m)  
An example of a configuration for a local concentration of devices  
15  
15-9  
Chapter 15: Appendix  
[6] Configuration combining local and long distance distribution  
In the basic configuration, if a specific controller is located a long distance away, or if there is a high  
voltage power source or noise generating source near the network, divide the network into two seg-  
ments and connect an optical cable between the two segments. This will allow you to construct a com-  
bined local and long distance network with good noise immunity.  
Optical fiber cable  
(maximum cable length: 2 km)  
Optical  
repeater  
Optical repeater  
Coaxial cable  
(maximum cable length: 500 m)  
Hub  
AUI cable  
(maximum cable  
length: 50 m)  
Twisted pair cable  
[UTP: Category 5]  
(Maximum cable length: 100 m)  
An example of a configuration combining local devices and long distance distribution  
15  
15-10  
Chapter 15: Appendix  
[7] Principles of the FL-net system  
The goal of an FL-net is real-time communication between controllers, such as programmable control-  
lers, robot controllers, and numeric control devices, in production systems.  
The FL-net constructs a token passing mechanism using an instantaneous information transfer based  
on Ethernet UDP/IP protocols to execute cyclic and message communications.  
[8] Differences between a general-purpose Ethernet and FL-net  
FL-net is a network developed specifically for the FA (Factory Automation) field. Therefore, not all  
general purpose Ethernet equipment can be used on the FL-net. Some items may not have suitable  
noise immunity in an electrically noisy environment.  
FL-net is must respond immediately, to maintain real-time communication for control, and therefore  
only controllers and control equipment compatible with the FL-net can be connected.  
FL-net employs a cyclic communication method, using the instantaneous information transfer func-  
tion of UDP/IP communication on 10BASE5/10BASE-T systems. Therefore, it has the following limi-  
tations.  
1. The devices currently available are only compatible with a 10Mbps Ethernet LAN.  
2. Cannot have other general-purpose Ethernet devices connected to the network.  
3. Does not support the TCP/IP communication function.  
4. The use of a switching hub is not supported.  
5. When a router is used, some router functions cannot be used.  
15  
15-11  
Chapter 15: Appendix  
15-3 Definition of network systems  
[1] Communication protocol standards  
The term "Communication protocol" refers to the rules for exchanging information between systems on  
a particular communication circuit. The communication protocols used by FL-net conform to the follow-  
ing standards.  
FL-net communication protocols  
FL-net supported  
Compatible specifications  
communication protocol  
FA link protocol specification sheets  
FL-net  
(MSTC FA open promotion committee, issued by the  
FA control network promotion committee)  
UDP  
RFC768  
IP, ICMP etc.  
APR etc.  
Ethernet  
RFC791, 792, 919, 922, 950  
RFC826, 894  
IEEE802.3  
[2] Hierarchical structure of the communication protocols  
The communication protocols are configured as a layered structure. Communication processes are  
expressed and standardized by classification and they are arranged in various levels. The FL-net con-  
sists of the following six protocol layers.  
Application layer  
Controller interface  
Service function  
Message transfer  
Token function  
Cyclic transfer  
FA link protocol layer  
FL-net  
protocol  
Transport layer  
Network layer  
UDP  
IP  
Data link layer  
Physical layer  
Ethernet  
(Compatible with IEEE802.3)  
Hierarchical structure of the FA link protocol  
15  
15-12  
Chapter 15: Appendix  
[3] Physical implementations of an FL-net  
There are five physical implementations of an Ethernet network that support a 10M bps data transfer  
speed. They are 10BASE5, 10BASE2, 10BASE-T, 10BASE-F, and 10BROAD36 (this is not common/).  
In addition to these implementations, a 100M bps Ethernet transmission speed is also available.  
The FL-net supports 10BASE5 (recommended), 10BASE2, and 10BASE-T hardware.  
[4] IP addresses on the FL-net  
In order to identify one communication device among lots of devices connected to an Ethernet network,  
the FL-net uses IP addresses (INET address). Therefore, each device that is connected to the network  
mist have its own IP address.  
An IP address consists of one part that identifies the network to which the device is connected, and a  
unique device address. Depending on the size of the network, a network can be classified as one of  
three classes: A, B, and C. (For special use, class D and E are also available.)  
Classes of IP address  
Top octet value  
0 to 127  
Network address section  
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx  
Device address section  
Xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx  
Class A  
Class B  
Class C  
128 to 191  
192 to 223  
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx  
Xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx  
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx  
Xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx  
(Note: The gray digits are respective addresses.)  
In a network, the IP address of all the communicating devices connected to this network will have the  
same network address. They should each have a unique device address.  
The default value for the FL-net IP address is "192.168.250.N" (N is the node number: 1 to 254). The  
FL-net standard recommends using a class C IP address and the lower three digits of the address can  
be used to assign node numbers according to the FL-net protocol.  
Network address  
Device address  
Fixed  
FL-net IP address  
15  
15-13  
Chapter 15: Appendix  
[5] FL-net sub net mask  
The sub net mask on an FL-net is always "255.255.255.0." The user does not need to set this sub net  
value.  
This value is identical to the original network address section and the device address section of the  
class C.  
[6] TCP/IP, UDP/IP protocols  
TCP, UDP, and IP are major protocols used on Ethernet networks.  
The IP is located in the network layer of communication protocols and controls the flow of communica-  
tion data.  
The TCP and UDP are located in the transport layer. Both use the IP as a network layer. However, there  
is not much difference between these protocols in their details.  
The TCP provides reliable service that does not care about the partition of data in the upper layer. On  
the other hand, the UDP transfers groups of data (data diagram) from the IP to the upper layer without  
any modification. It pays no attention to whether or not the data arrives nor does it care what the  
destination is. Confirmation of the data being received and re-sending the data is the job of the upper  
layer.  
Although the UDP is not reliable, compared with the TCP, its advantage is that it has a small communi-  
cation overhead.  
The FL-net uses the UDP. This is because the TCP's data confirmation and re-sending procedures  
make it difficult to meet the FL-net goals. By omitting this procedure, the FL-net protocol layer controls  
data transmission correctly using tokens. And it divides and recombines multiple frames, so that it can  
provide high speed data exchange.  
[7] FL-net port number  
In order to offer service from the FL-net protocol layer, that is the upper position of the transport layer,  
the following port numbers are already specified. However, the user does not need to set the param-  
eters for these port numbers.  
FL-net port number  
Name  
Port number  
55000 (fixed)  
55001 (fixed)  
55002 (fixed)  
55003 (fixed)  
1
2
3
4
Port number for cyclic transfer  
Port number for message communication  
Port number for a participation request frame  
Port number for sending data  
15  
15-14  
Chapter 15: Appendix  
[8] FL-net data format  
(1) Outline of the FL-net data format  
Data that are sent and received over the FL-net are packed in each layer of the communication  
protocol as follows.  
Less than 1024 bytes  
User data  
FL-net header  
User data  
UDP header  
FL-net data  
UDP segment  
IP header UDP header  
FL-net data  
IP data diagram  
Ethernet header IP header  
UDP header  
FL-net data  
Trailer  
Ethernet frame  
15  
15-15  
Chapter 15: Appendix  
One frame of FL-net data that can be monitored in a communication circuit is shown below. In the  
example below, 128 bytes of cyclic data is being transferred.  
Ethernet header  
UDP header  
IP header  
FL-net header  
User data  
Sample frame of FL-net data  
15  
15-16  
Chapter 15: Appendix  
(2) FL-net header format  
The FL-net header is 64 to 96 bytes long.  
64 to 96 byes  
FL-net header  
Less than 1024 bytes  
Cyclic/message data  
Lower layer  
header  
FA link data  
Less than 1500 byes  
FL-net header  
An FL-net header is added to every frame, to comply with the FL-net protocol.  
[9] FL-net transaction code  
The FL-net provides the following services with the message transmission service.  
Message transmission service  
No. Message transmission service of the FL-net  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Read byte-block data  
Write byte-block data  
Read word-block data  
Write word-block data  
Read network parameters  
Write network parameters  
Stop commands  
Run commands  
Read profile  
10 Read log data  
11 Clear log data  
13 Return message  
14 Transfer transmission message  
15  
15-17  
Chapter 15: Appendix  
Each message has a transaction code for requesting or responding in its header. It is used to identify  
the message frame.  
Table of transaction codes  
Transaction code  
Application  
Transmission message  
Reserved  
0 to 5999  
60000 to 64999  
65000  
Cyclic header (with token)  
Cyclic header (without token)  
Participation request frame header  
Read byte block data (request)  
Write byte block data (request)  
Read word block data (request)  
Write word block data (request)  
Read network parameter (request)  
Write network parameter (request)  
Stop instruction (request)  
65001  
65002  
65003  
65004  
65005  
65006  
65007  
65008  
65009  
65010  
Run instruction (request)  
65011  
Read profile (request)  
65012  
Trigger header  
65013  
Read log (request)  
65014  
Clear log (request)  
65015  
To test for a message return (request)  
Reserved (for future extension)  
Read byte block data (response)  
Write byte block data (response)  
Read word block data (response)  
Write word block data (response)  
Read network parameter (response)  
Write network parameter (response)  
Stop instruction (response)  
Run instruction (response)  
Read profile (response)  
65016 to 65202  
65203  
65204  
65205  
65206  
65207  
65208  
65209  
65210  
65211  
65212  
Reserved  
65213  
Read log (response)  
65214  
Clear log (response)  
65215  
To test for a message return (response)  
Reserved (for future extension)  
Reserved  
65216 to 65399  
65400 to 65535  
15  
15-18  
Chapter 15: Appendix  
15-4 Network control of the FL-net  
[1] Token control of the FL-net  
(1) Token  
Basically, a node can send data whenever it holds a token. A node can send data without holding a  
token when it reissues a token due to a time out of the token monitor time, or when it issues a  
participation request frame so that it can begin participating in the network.  
The FA net routes one token between the nodes.  
Each node keeps the right to send data over the network from the time it receives the token until  
it passes the token to another node.  
The token flows through all the nodes participating in an FL-net.  
A token can be sent together with cyclic data.  
A token can be routed without data.  
Tokens are monitored by the timer. If the token is not passed along through the network for a  
certain interval, the network will automatically reissue a token.  
If there are two tokens on the same network, the JW-50FL will unify them into one token.  
15  
15-19  
Chapter 15: Appendix  
(2) Flow of the token  
Basically, only one token exists on the same network.  
If there are two or more tokens on the same network, the token from the node with the smaller node  
number takes priority, and the other tokens are discarded.  
A frame with a token (a token frame) consists of a destination node number and the node number of  
the node sending the token.  
A node will become the node holding the token when the destination node number in a token frame  
matches its own node number.  
The routing order of a token is determined by the node numbers.  
Each node passes the token in the order of the nodes listed in the participating node management  
table.  
The node with the largest node number will pass the token to a node with the smallest node number.  
Passes the token to  
the next node  
Node 2  
Node 1  
Node 3  
Node N-1  
Passes the token to the node with  
the smallest node number  
Node N  
Flow route taken by the token.  
15  
15-20  
Chapter 15: Appendix  
(3) Token and data  
There are six data patterns that can be attached to and sent with a token, as follows.  
Token and data  
Details  
Item  
No.  
No data to attach  
Only sends the token  
1
Token  
Cyclic data only  
Token + Cyclic data  
Only attaches cyclic data to the token  
2
3
Sends only cyclic data. The token is attached to the  
last frame.  
Cyclic data sent in frames.  
Token + Cyclic data  
Message data only  
Cyclic data  
After sending the message data, passes the token along.  
4
5
Message data  
Token  
After sending the message data, sends the cyclic  
data together with the token.  
Cyclic data and message data  
Token + Cyclic data  
Message data  
After sending the message data, the cyclic data is  
sent by itself. Then the token is sent by attaching it to  
the last frame.  
Cyclic data sent in frames and  
message data.  
6
Cyclic data  
Message data  
Token + Cyclic data  
15  
15-21  
Chapter 15: Appendix  
(4) Interval between frames (minimum allowable interval between frames)  
The time interval after a node receives a token until it sends a frame is referred to as the "frame  
interval."  
The minimum interval that each node must wait for, before sending a frame, is referred to as the  
"minimum allowable frame interval."  
The FL-net shares this minimum allowable frame interval throughout the network.  
Each node calculates the maximum value of the minimum frame interval each time a node joins or  
leaves the participating node list.  
15  
15-22  
Chapter 15: Appendix  
[2] Joining and leaving an FL-net network  
(1) Participation in the FL-net  
Each node monitors the circuit while the FL-net starts up, to determine the interval of a participating  
token detection time. When that time has elapsed, if it does not receive a token, the node concludes  
that the network is just starting and tries to join the network as it starts. If it receives a token, it  
concludes that it is monitoring a network that is in-ring startup state, and it tries to join the network.  
New entry  
If the JW-50FL does not receive a token after the participating token detection time has elapsed,  
it will prepare to send a trigger, which it sends after 4 ms x its node number. If it receives a trigger  
before sending a trigger, it will not send a trigger. After receiving a trigger it will wait 1200 ms to  
receive a participation request frame. During that period, it will wait for all of the nodes to send  
participation request frames while checking for duplicate use of its node number and address. It  
also updates participation node management table. After the time it must wait before sending a  
participation request frame (node number x 4 ms) has elapsed, it will send a participation request  
frame. At this time, if a node has identified a duplicate use of its address by examining the partici-  
pation request frames from other nodes, it sets the common memory top address and common  
memory size of area 1 and 2 to zero, and does not send any cyclic data. A node that identifies  
duplicate use of its address will set a duplicate address flag and reset the common memory data  
to enable, so that the flag will be seen. After the time it must wait before sending a participation  
request frame has elapsed, and after referring to the participating node table, the node with the  
smallest node number will issue the first token. A node that has identified duplicate use of its node  
number will not send or receive data.  
Trigger  
Participation  
request frame  
Token  
Start monitoring node  
(After power is applied or a reset  
is released)  
Node1  
Node2  
Participation token detection time (3 sec.)  
Node3  
Waiting time before sending a participation  
request frame (node number x 4 ms)  
Node254  
Waiting time before receiving a participation  
request frame (1.2 sec.)  
Time chart when starting: 1  
15  
15-23  
Chapter 15: Appendix  
Participation in an existing network  
When the JW-50FL receives a token within the participating token detection time, it concludes that it  
is linked to a network that is already established, and waits for a participation request frame up to  
three token cycles. During this interval, it checks for duplicate use of its node number and address,  
as well as updates the participation node operation table. At this time, if a node has identified a  
duplicate use of its address by examining the participation request frames from other nodes, it sets  
the common memory top address and common memory size of area 1 and 2 to zero, and does not  
send any cyclic data. A node that identifies duplicate use of its address will set a duplicate address  
flag and reset the common memory data to enable, so that the flag will be seen. If there are no  
problems with the node numbers, a node will send a participation request frame after the waiting time  
for sending a participating request frame has elapsed. The participating request frame will be sent,  
regardless whether it has a token or not. A node that has identified duplicate use of its node number  
will not send a participating request frame and will not send or receive data.  
Remarks:  
Participation token detection time: the time allowed to check whether the network is in operation  
or not.  
Cycling: This refers to the point when the smallest node number receives a token that has been  
passed around the network.  
Waiting time for sending a participation request frame: In order not to create a duplicate node  
number with some other node trying to enter, the participation request frame is sent after the node  
number x 4ms has elapsed.  
1st cycle  
2nd cycle  
3rd cycle  
Halted token detection  
Participating token detection time  
Start monitoring  
nodes  
(After turning ON  
the power or  
when a reset is  
released)  
Waiting time for sending a  
participation request frame  
(Local node number x 4 ms)  
Send a participation  
request frame  
Time charge setting when starting: 2  
15  
15-24  
Chapter 15: Appendix  
(2) Leaving an FL-net network  
Each node checks the node numbers each time it receives a token frame. If the JW-50FL does not  
receive a token frame from a certain node three times in a row, the node is regarded as having left  
the network.  
(This is also true when the node holding the token does not send the token after token monitor time  
has elapsed.)  
If the JW-50FL determines that a node has left the network, it deletes that node's number from the  
management table.  
15  
15-25  
Chapter 15: Appendix  
[3] Node status control  
The status control of nodes consists of a local node management table, a participating nodes manage-  
ment table, and a network management table. An outline of each is shown below.  
Outline of each table used for node status control  
Name  
Details  
Control its own node settings.  
Local node management table  
Participating nodes management table Control information about nodes participating the network.  
Network management table Control information shared throughout the network.  
[4] FL-net Local node management table  
(1) Basic function  
Control data relating to this node. An outline is shown below.  
Used for reading participating request frames and network parameters.  
The control data are set by the FL-net upper layer when this node starts.  
The node name, top address and size of the data send area in the common memory can be set  
through the network.  
(2) Control data  
Individual node management table  
Number  
of bytes  
Item  
Description  
Node number  
1 byte 1 to 254  
Area 1 of common memory: Data top address 2 bytes Word address (0 to 0x1ff)  
Area 1 of common memory: Data size 2 bytes Size (0 to 0x1ff)  
Area 2 of common memory: Data top address 2 bytes Word address (0 to 0x1fff)  
Area 2 of common memory: Data size  
Upper layer status  
2 bytes Size (0 to 0x1fff)  
2 bytes RUN/STOP/ALARM/WARNING/NORMAL  
1 byte In units of 1 msec.  
Token monitor time  
Minimum separation of frames  
Vendor name  
1 byte In units of 100 µsec.  
10 bytes Vender name  
Manufacturer name  
Node name (facility name)  
Protocol version  
10 bytes Manufacture model name, device name  
10 bytes Node name by user entry  
1 byte Fixed to 0x80  
FA link status  
1 byte Participate/leave  
Local node's status  
1 byte Doubled node number detection, etc.  
15  
15-26  
Chapter 15: Appendix  
[5] FL-net Participating node management table  
(1) Basic functions  
The status of each node is monitored by the management table which each node keeps for itself.  
This table handles the data used to control each node participating in the network. The operation is  
outlined below.  
When starting, it receives a token frame and refreshes the participating node management table  
and network management table.  
Each node refreshes its own participating node management table when it receives a token  
frame.  
Renews the participating node management table when receiving a participation request frame  
of a new entry.  
Delete any node that does not send a token frame or which times out three times in a row.  
(2) Control data  
The participating node management table contains data related to the nodes currently participating  
in the network.  
Participating node management table  
Number  
Item  
Description  
of bytes  
Node number  
1 byte 1 to 254  
Upper layer status  
2 bytes RUN/STOP/ALARM/WARNING/NORMAL  
Area 1 of common memory: Data top address 2 bytes Word address (0 to 0x1ff)  
Area 1 of common memory: Data size 2 bytes Size (0 to 0x1ff)  
Area 2 of common memory: Data top address 2 bytes Word address (0 to 0x1fff)  
Area 2 of common memory: Data size  
Allowable refresh cycle time  
Token monitor time  
2 bytes Size (0 to 0x1fff)  
2 bytes In units of 1 msec.  
1 byte In units of 1 msec.  
1 byte In units of 100 µsec.  
1 byte Participate/leave  
Minimum separation of frames  
Link status  
- "0x1ff" is the hexadecimal notation for 1FF(HEX).  
Note: This information is contained in the token frame received.  
15  
15-27  
Chapter 15: Appendix  
[6] Status management of the FL-net  
(1) Basic functions  
Control parameters related to the network.  
(2) Management data  
Network management table  
Number  
of bytes  
Item  
Description  
Token latch node number  
1 byte Currently token staying node.  
1 byte In units of 100 µsec.  
2 bytes In units of 1 msec.  
2 bytes In units of 1 msec.  
2 bytes In units of 1 msec.  
2 bytes In units of 1 msec.  
Minimum frame interval  
Allowable refresh cycle time  
Measured refresh cycle time (current value)  
Measured refresh cycle time (maximum value)  
Measured refresh cycle time (minimum value)  
[7] Control message sequence number of the FL-net  
(1) Basic function  
The control sequence number and version of sequence number for a message transmission.  
(2) Sending control data  
Sending control data for message sequence number control  
Item number  
Number of bytes  
Details  
Version of sequence number for  
the send message transmission.  
Version of sequence number  
4 bytes  
Sequence number (1: N transfer) 4 bytes  
0x1 to 0xffffffff  
0x1 to 0xffffffff  
Sequence number (1: 1 transfer) 4 bytes x 256  
- "0xffffffff" is the hexadecimal notation for FFFFFFFF(HEX).  
(3) Received control data  
Received control data for message serial control  
Item number  
Number of bytes  
Details  
Version of sequence number  
4 bytes  
0x1 to 0xffffffff  
: 0x1 to 0xffffffff  
: 0x1 to 0xffffffff  
Sequence number (1: 1 transfer) 4 bytes  
Sequence number (1: N transfer) 4 bytes  
- "0xffffffff" is the hexadecimal notation for FFFFFFFF(HEX).  
15  
15-28  
Chapter 15: Appendix  
15-5 Parts needed to build a network  
[1] Parts needed to configure an Ethernet  
The parts needed to configure an Ethernet are shown below.  
For details about these parts, see section [2] and [3].  
Transceiver cable  
(AUI cable)  
Coaxial cable  
Ground  
terminal  
Multi-port  
Transceiver  
Repeater  
Repeater  
Single port  
Transceiver  
Repeater  
HUB  
10BASE-T  
Transceiver cable  
(AUI cable)  
Ground  
terminal  
Single port  
Transceiver  
Multi-port  
Transceiver  
Parts needed to construct an Ethernet  
15  
15-29  
Chapter 15: Appendix  
[2] Parts related to 10BASE5  
(1) Transceiver  
A transceiver converts signals flowing through coaxial cables (yellow cables) into signals that the  
nodes can use, and vise-versa.  
When you want to connect a transceiver, it should be installed at a distance of 2.5 m (or a multiple of  
2.5 m) from any other transceiver. Coaxial cables are marked at 2.5 m intervals. That makes it easy  
to install the transceiver over one of these marks on the cable.  
Before connecting a transceiver to a coaxial cable, shut OFF the power supplies for the nodes and  
transceivers. If you make a connection while the power is still on, you may cause a short circuit.  
Use transceivers that conform to the IEEE802.3 standard.  
Secure using cable ties etc. (two positions)  
Transceiver cable  
Coaxial cable  
Transceiver (tap type)  
Leave enough extra length to be able to ensure  
the minimum bending radius (80 mm).  
Conceptual drawing of a transceiver  
Transceiver cable (AUI cable)  
Retainer  
Coaxial cable (yellow cable)  
Label TR  
Transceiver (tap type)  
Transceiver and transceiver cable (AUI cable)  
15  
15-30  
Chapter 15: Appendix  
Tap connector  
M6 bolts 141  
LAN transceiver  
Installation of a tap in the main case of a transceiver  
Transceiver (tap type)  
To connect a tap type transceiver to a coaxial cable, make a hole in the coaxial cable insulation and  
insert a probe that will make contact with center conductor in the coaxial cable. Remove the insula-  
tion around the coaxial cable using a special tool.  
Supply power from a node to the transceiver (12 VDC) using a transceiver cable. Some nodes may  
require a separate 12 VDC power supply in order to use the transceiver cable. For details, see the  
hardware manual for your node.  
The "SQE" switch setting on a transceiver is made as follows.  
1. ON when connected to a node.  
2. OFF when connected to a repeater.  
Coaxial cable  
Transceiver cable  
(AUI cable)  
Transceiver  
AUI connector  
D-sub 15-pin  
When using an AUI external  
power input terminal block  
12 VDC (depends on the  
model used)  
12 VDC  
external  
power  
15  
supply  
Transceiver (tap type) for Ethernet cable  
15-31  
Chapter 15: Appendix  
Transceiver (connector type)  
Install the transceiver connector on a coaxial cable. Then, connect the transceiver to the connector.  
No special tools are needed for this connection, and it is easy to install and remove.  
The transceiver must be supplied with power from a node through a transceiver cable.  
Coaxial cable  
Transceiver  
Transceiver cable  
(AUI cable)  
AUI connector  
D-sub 15-pin  
An example of an AUI external  
12 VDC  
external  
power  
power input terminal block  
12 VDC  
(Depending on the model used)  
supply  
Transceiver (connector type) for Ethernet cable  
15  
15-32  
Chapter 15: Appendix  
Multi-port transceiver  
The tap type transceiver and connector type transceiver can only be used to connect one terminal. A  
multi-port transceiver can connect a number of nodes. In practice, 4- and 8-port type transceivers are  
available.  
Coaxial cable  
Transceiver cable  
(AUI cable)  
Transceiver cable  
(AUI cable)  
Transceiver cable  
(AUI cable)  
Transceiver cable  
(AUI cable)  
Note: Use a power supply cable to supply power to the transceiver.  
Multi-port transceiver for Ethernet cables  
15  
15-33  
Chapter 15: Appendix  
Repeater  
A repeater is used to relay or transfer signals. It is used for communication between segments using  
different media, to extend the length of a segment, to increase the number terminals that can be  
connected, or to convert from one cable type to another. A repeater reads the electronic signals from  
one segment, amplifies the signal as required, and sends it to all the segments connected to the  
repeater.  
The maximum transceiver cable length that can be connected to the repeater is 50 m. However, we  
recommend using transceiver cable lengths of 2 m or less to prevent problems caused by noise. Pay  
attention to the SQE switch settings.  
Coaxial cable  
Transceiver cable  
Transceiver  
Repeater  
(AUI cable)  
A 2 m or shorter  
transceiver cable is  
recommended for  
connecting a  
repeater  
Ethernet Repeater  
15  
15-34  
Chapter 15: Appendix  
(2) Coaxial cable  
Coaxial cable consists of a center conductor and an external conductive layer that functions as a  
shield. Coaxial cables used for Ethernet connections must have 50 ohms of impedance. An RG58A/  
U cable can be used with 10BASE2 and a yellow cable can be used with 10BASE5.  
The maximum length of a single 10BASE2 cable is 185 m and the maximum length of a 10BASE5  
cable is 500 m.  
Make sure to connect the shield (external conductive) to the ground to prevent problems from noise  
(class D single point ground).  
Center conductor  
Aluminum/polyester  
Braid shield  
(tin plated mild copper wire)  
(tin plated mild copper wire) tape  
Four layer construction  
of the outer conductor  
Jacket  
(PVC)  
Jacket ring mark  
(every 2.5 m)  
Insulation  
material  
Coaxial cable for Ethernet networks  
(3) Coaxial connectors  
A coaxial connector is usually an "N" type connector. It is used to connect the coaxial cable to a  
termination device, another coaxial cable or to a connector type transceiver.  
Coaxial connector for Ethernet use  
15  
15-35  
Chapter 15: Appendix  
(4) Relay connector  
This connector is used to make a connection between coaxial cables. Although the repeater is used  
to extend a segment, a relay connector is used to extend a cable in the same segment. Be careful  
because the use of multiple relay connectors on the same line may change the electrical resistance  
of the coaxial cable. (We recommend not using more than one relay connector in the same line.)  
Relay connector for Ethernet use  
(5) Terminator (terminating resistor)  
This is a device attached to the two ends of a cable, in order to prevent reflection of the signals in a  
bus type arrangement. Terminators should always be connected to the ends of the cable. Without  
termination device, signal reflection (collisions) may occur and the network may go down. Both "J"  
type (used with a tap type transceiver) and "P" type (used for a connector type transceiver) termina-  
tors are available. Install the terminators at one of the marks on the outer insulation of the coaxial  
cable.  
Terminator (terminating resistor) for Ethernet use  
15  
15-36  
Chapter 15: Appendix  
(6) Ground terminal of a coaxial cable  
This device is used to prevent communication data errors that may be caused by electrical noise on  
a coaxial cable. There should only be one ground point on any single piece of coaxial cable. Provide  
class D grounding to connect this device.  
Coaxial cable ground terminal for Ethernet use  
(7) Transceiver cable  
This cable is used to connect a transceiver to a node. The transceiver cable has a D-sub 15-pin AUI  
connector on both ends. The maximum length allowed is 50 m. However, we recommend keeping  
the cable length to 15 m or less to prevent problems from noise. Cables with a ground terminal must  
be grounded.  
Node side  
Ground terminal  
Transceiver side  
Transceiver cable for Ethernet use.  
15  
15-37  
Chapter 15: Appendix  
(8) 10BASE5/10BASE-T converter  
This converter is used to connect a 10BASE5 cable to a 10BASE-T cable.  
10BASE-T connector LED  
(female)  
10BASE5 connector  
(male)  
10BASE5/10BASE-T converter for Ethernet use  
Coaxial cable  
Transceiver cable  
(AUI cable)  
Transceiver  
10BASE-T  
Installation of a 10BASE5/10BASE-T converter for Ethernet use.  
15  
15-38  
Chapter 15: Appendix  
(9) Coaxial/optical converter, repeater  
This device converts electrical signals on a coaxial cable (10BASE5/10BASE2) into optical signals,  
and from optical signals to electrical signals. A FOIRL (Fiber Optic Inter Repeater Link) is used to  
connect repeaters in a 10BASE-FL network. The device is used to prevent noise and extend the  
length of a cable.  
Optical connector (SMA)  
10BASE5 connector (D-sub)  
Optical connector (ST)  
10BASE-FL (optical)  
Plant A  
Plant B  
2 km max.  
Repeater,  
bridge,  
etc.  
Coaxial /optical converter, repeater for Ethernet use  
15  
15-39  
Chapter 15: Appendix  
[3] 10BASE-T related items  
(1) Hub  
A hub connects a number of twisted pair cables in a10BASE-T installation and it has a repeater  
function.  
Some types of hubs have a 10BASE2 interface or a cascade interface. When you need to cascade  
hubs, you can use up to 4 layers. A star coupling hub allows the use of one hub with several hub  
functions.  
Coaxial cable  
Transceiver  
Hub  
10BASE-T  
Ethernet Hub  
15  
15-40  
Chapter 15: Appendix  
(2) 10BASE-T cable  
This cable is also called "twisted pair cable" or "twisted couple cable." Two copper wires are twisted  
around each other as a pair. These pairs are bundled together in sets and covered with external  
insulating cover. The following types are available.  
STP cable with a shield, and UTP cable without a shield.  
A cross cable can be directly connected between nodes and straight cable can connect nodes  
through a hub.  
The maximum transfer speed of 10BASE-T cable is 10M bps and the maximum length is 100 m. The  
connectors at both ends of the cable are 8-pole modular connectors specified in ISO8877.  
Use category 5 compatible 10BASE-T cable for an FL-net.  
10BASE-T  
1
Pair 2  
Pair 1  
Pair 4  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Pair 3  
10BASE-T cable for Ethernet use  
(3) 10BASE-T/optical converter, repeater  
This device is used to convert electrical signals on a 10BASE-T cable into optical signals.  
A FOIRL (Fiber Optic Inter Repeater Link) is used to connect between repeaters and a 10BASE-FL  
with terminals. This is used to prevent problems caused by electrical noise and to extend a cable's  
length.  
MLL connector (male)  
RJ45 (female)  
10BASE-T/optical converter, repeater for Ethernet use  
15  
15-41  
Chapter 15: Appendix  
15-6 Installation of an FL-net network  
[1] Wiring 10BASE5 coaxial cable  
(1) Laying and connecting cables  
Various installation methods can be used, depending on local conditions. The major wiring methods  
are shown below.  
Exposed wiring on a wall.  
Free access, wiring beneath the floor.  
Wring inside cable racks  
Laying cable in the ceiling.  
(2) Precautions for laying and hooking up  
Please observe the following precautions when laying cable and hooking up a network.  
In principle, conduct all work indoors.  
Cables may be stressed when secured on a wall. Except in special cases, provide support for the  
cable at approximately 1 m intervals. Be careful not to deform the cables when securing them.  
When laying cables inside cable racks or in the ceiling, secure them at appropriate intervals so  
that the cables will not sag.  
When laying cables below the floor or next to a wall, provide protective covers for the cables to  
avoid damage from foot traffic or carts.  
It is best to ground the external shield on the cables.  
When grounding, ground only one point of each segment using class 3 grounding techniques.  
In order to prevent contact between the conductor and exposed metal on any other device , apply  
boots or insulation tape to "N" and "L" type connectors, linear sleeves, and terminators.  
Make sure the cable is always at least 60 cm away from AC power cables (more than 100 VAC).  
15  
15-42  
Chapter 15: Appendix  
(3) Major coaxial cable installation specifications  
The primary coaxial cable installation requirements are as follows:  
Coaxial cable installation information  
Item  
Specifications and details  
When routing a cable  
Minimum 100 mm radius in corners  
When securing a cable Minimum 100 mm radius in corners  
Cable tension  
Cable weight  
Max. 25 kg  
188 kg/km  
(4) Installation of coaxial connectors  
Install coaxial connectors (N-PC) as follows.  
Strip the PVC sheath  
Stripping the sheath (PVC sheath) on a coaxial cable  
15  
15-43  
Chapter 15: Appendix  
Remove the aluminum braided screen around the cable  
1. Remove aluminum screen around the cable  
* Remove all the aluminum tape on this part.  
2. Remove the aluminum tape on the cable  
* Remove the aluminum tape at the two positions shown above.  
Strip the insulation material around the conductor.  
Assemble the connector and shield parts  
Braided shield Clamp  
Gasket Nut  
(rubber)  
PVC cap  
(I-PCC)  
Shielding coaxial cables and soldering the pin.  
Solder coil  
15  
15-44  
Chapter 15: Appendix  
Assemble the coaxial cable connector  
Note: The gap between the center pin and the insulator should not be larger than 1 mm. The insula-  
tion material must be intact.  
(5) Transceiver  
Installing and securing a tap type transceiver  
The method and location for installing a transceiver depends on the local conditions. However,  
common installation locations are as follows.  
Install on a wall  
Install in the free access space under the floor  
Install in the ceiling or in a cable rack  
Install near a station  
The precautions when installing a transceiver are as follows:  
Secure the transceiver on the floor or a flat surface using foot, or secure it using self-tapping  
screws.  
When installing a transceiver in the ceiling or below the floor, select a location that is easy to  
access for maintenance and checking.  
The installation distance between transceivers is 2.5 m. (Use the markers on the cable that are  
spaced every 2.5 m)  
15  
15-45  
Chapter 15: Appendix  
Handling and installation procedures  
1. Names of the parts in the transceiver  
Markers every 2.5 m on the coaxial cable  
cover.  
Install a probe at this position.  
Coaxial cable  
Shield crimping pin  
Securing screw  
Tap case  
Coaxial probe  
Frame  
Main case of the HLT-200TC  
Tap screw  
15  
15-46  
Chapter 15: Appendix  
2. Insert a shield crimping pin into the tap case.  
3. Tighten the case screw so that it will not loosen.  
4. Place the tap case at one of the markers located every 2.5 m on the coaxial cable. Insert a frame  
into the slide and secure the case using the screw. (Tighten the screw so that distance between  
top of the tap case and holding metal is approximately 1 mm.)  
Center of the 2.5 m mark  
Transceiver tap frame and tap installation device.  
15  
15-47  
Chapter 15: Appendix  
Insert into the transceiver tap frame and coaxial cable  
Note: When inserting a frame, make sure that the cable is at the center of the crimping pin. Tighten  
the screw a little and see if the clamping part is tilted very much. If so, loosen the screw and  
reposition the cable so that frame is at the center of the tap.  
5. Drill a hole for the core probe until white insulation material can be seen. (Please note that when  
the securing screw is loosened, some aluminum tape may remain. Remove the plastic chips from  
the hole.)  
15  
15-48  
Chapter 15: Appendix  
6. Tighten the core probe using a special spanner.  
Note: That completes the installation of a tap connector. The test method for a proper installation is  
shown below.  
- The shield-crimping pin shall be shorted.  
- When a terminator is installed at both ends of a coaxial cable, the resistance between the  
core probe and the shield crimping pin] should be 25 ohms.  
However, if a system is already operating, do not perform the test procedures above since it may  
cause the system to malfunction.  
7. Insert the transceiver main housing to the tap connector. Align the shield crimping pin and core  
probe so that they are vertical.  
15  
15-49  
Chapter 15: Appendix  
8. If you think the shield-crimping pin or the core probe may be bent, pull them out. If they are  
inserted improperly, you may be able to see that they are bent. In this case, realign them. Insert  
the tap screw in the hole in the top of the case, and tighten it.  
Securing the transceiver's main case and tap  
Setting the SQE switch  
In general, set the SQE switch as follows:  
SQE switch settings  
Item  
Setting  
ON  
When connected to a node  
When connected to a repeater  
OFF  
15  
15-50  
Chapter 15: Appendix  
(6) Installation of terminators (terminating resistors)  
Insulation on connectors and terminators  
Shown below is a method for insulating a relay connector and an "L" type connector.  
Coaxial connector  
Straight sleeve  
(type N)  
Insulation sleeve cut away  
Insulation sleeve  
Insulation tape  
Coaxial cable  
Insulating a relay connector  
Insulation tape  
Coaxial connector (type N)  
L type connector  
Insulation sleeve cut away  
Transceiver NJ connector  
Insulating an L type connector  
The method for insulating a terminator (T-NP male and T-NJ female) is as follows.  
- Cover the insulation sleeve (black) (I-NPC) to the male T-NP.  
- Cover an insulation sleeve (black) (I-NJP) to the female T-NJ.  
15  
15-51  
Chapter 15: Appendix  
(7) Installation of a transceiver cable  
An example of how to install a transceiver and transceiver cable is shown below.  
An example of how to install parts on a wall  
An example of how to install parts in the ceiling and below the floor  
An example of how to install a transceiver and transceiver cable  
Example of an installation on a wall (1)  
Coaxial cable  
Wiring duct  
(metal or plastic)  
Transceiver cable  
Saddle  
Wooden  
board  
(160 x 130 x 1.0)  
An example of how to install a transceiver and transceiver cable on a wall  
15  
15-52  
Chapter 15: Appendix  
An example of an installation  
on a wall (2)  
Wooden board  
(1600 x 180 x 1.0)  
An example of an installation  
on a wall (3)  
Wooden board  
(180 x 180 x 1.0)  
An example of an installation  
on a wall (4)  
Installation example of a transceiver and transceiver cable: 1  
15  
15-53  
Chapter 15: Appendix  
An example of an installation in a ceiling  
An example of an installation below a floor  
Installation example of a transceiver and transceiver cable: 2  
15  
15-54  
Chapter 15: Appendix  
(8) Installation of a ground terminal for a coaxial cable  
A method for installing a grounding terminal for a coaxial cable is shown below. Set up a single  
ground point (class 3 or better grounding) using a ground terminal (G-TM).  
Ground a coaxial cable at any one point.  
Ground terminal (G-TM)  
Class D or better  
grounding  
15  
15-55  
Chapter 15: Appendix  
[2] 10BASE-T (UTP)  
(1) How to create a 10BASE-T (UTP) cable  
Strip the sheath on a 10BASE-T (UTP) cable  
Cut the sheath 40 mm away from the end and  
untwist the cables. Lay them out in the same  
order as the terminals.  
Terminal arrangement  
T568B  
T568A  
Normal  
(straight)  
Normally, you use a straight cable.  
Cross cable  
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Brown  
Brown  
White/brown  
Orange  
White/brown  
Green  
White/blue  
Blue  
White/blue  
Blue  
40 mm  
White/green  
Orange  
White/green  
Green  
White/orange White/orange  
Cut the signal lines in a 10BASE-T (UTP) cable  
Cut the signal lines 14 mm away from the sheath using a nipper.  
14 mm  
15  
15-56  
Chapter 15: Appendix  
Insert the UTP cable signal lines into the connector  
Install the signal lines in the correct order, and check to make sure the wires reach all the way into  
the connector. Look at the connector from the front, top and bottom.  
Assembling a UTP cable connector  
After making sure the signal lines are fully inserted, crimp the connector using a special tool. After  
crimping, check the connector using a dedicated tester.  
Special tool for crimping UTP connectors  
UTP connector  
Insert the connector  
Crimp with the tool  
15  
15-57  
Chapter 15: Appendix  
15-7 Grounding the FL-net system  
[1] Outline of the grounding procedures for the FL-net system  
This section uses an example of how to ground an FL-net controller control panel when attaching the  
control panel to the steel frame of a building.  
In order to ground the control panel to a building frame, the following conditions need to be satisfied. If  
the ground cannot meet the conditions below, provide an exclusive class D ground for the controller.  
1. All of the steel frames must be welded to each other.  
2. Class D grounding standards must be met between the controller ground and the steel frame.  
3. No strong electrical current should flow through the ground terminal on the controller.  
4. Keep a distance of 15 m or more between the controller ground point and any ground for a high  
current electrical power panel.  
Building's steel frame  
Control  
panel  
High current  
panel  
Contact point on  
the steel frame  
Keep a distance of 15 m or more  
An example of how to ground a control panel: 1 (grounded to the steel frame of a building)  
Steel frame of  
a building  
Control  
panel  
High current  
panel  
Contact point on  
the steel frame  
PLC etc.  
15  
An example of how to ground a control panel: 2 (exclusive class D ground)  
15-58  
Chapter 15: Appendix  
[2] Wiring power lines and grounding equipment  
This section describes how to wire power lines and ground lines in a distribution panel, or controller  
panel for the FL-net system.  
When wiring power lines and making grounds, observe the precautions below.  
1. Isolate the control power circuit from the controller power circuit using an isolation transformer with a  
static electricity protective function.  
2. Ground the frames of the distribution panel and the control panel using class D grounding.  
3. Provide an exclusive class D or better ground to the controller FG (frame ground) terminal. Do not  
connect this terminal to the controller frame.  
4. The wiring for the power line to the controller should be as short as possible, using twisted power  
cables.  
5. Connect the LG (line ground) terminal on the controller to the shield terminal on the isolation trans-  
former, and then to the frame ground on the panel.  
Control Distribution  
power  
Operation  
preparation  
Relay circuit  
Control panel  
panel  
PLC, etc.  
Controller ground  
Panel  
ground  
Panel ground  
2
2
(5.5 mm or larger)  
(5.5 mm or larger)  
Class  
D ground  
Class  
D ground  
Class  
D ground  
An example of how to ground the FL-net system  
15  
15-59  
Chapter 15: Appendix  
[3] Wiring the power lines and grounding the network equipment in an FL-net  
This section describes how to wire the power lines and ground lines for the network equipment in an FL-  
net system.  
When wiring power lines and making ground connections, observe the precautions below.  
1. Connect the coaxial cable ground terminal to the class D ground that is specially created for the  
controller.  
2. Connect the frame ground of the hubs for a 10BASE-T system to the class D ground that is specially  
created for the controller. Supply power to the hub from an isolation transformer with a static electric-  
ity protective function (used to power the controller).  
3. Provide an exclusive class D or better ground for the controller FG (frame ground) terminal. Do not  
connect this terminal to the controller frame.  
4. Connect the FG (frame ground) terminal of FL-net modules to the FG (frame ground) of the controller.  
5. Connect the shield ground on the transceiver (AUI) cable to the FG (frame ground) terminal on the  
FL-net module.  
6. When a transceiver (AUI) needs DC power (12 VDC etc.), provide a stable power supply for exclusive  
use by the network, and connect the DC output terminals to the FL-net module. 100 VAC input power  
needs to be supplied from the isolation transformer, the same as for the controller.  
Transceiver  
Ground terminal  
Coaxial cable  
Hub  
Transceiver  
cable  
(AUI cable)  
Isolation  
transformer with  
static electricity  
protective function  
100 VAC  
Class D ground  
12 VDC power  
for AUI  
Class D ground  
exclusively for use  
by the controller  
100 VAC  
Example of how to wire power lines and ground lines for network equipment in the FL-net system  
15  
15-60  
Chapter 15: Appendix  
[4] Installation of network equipment in an FL-net  
Shown below is an example installation of network equipment in an FL-net system.  
1. Install a transceiver in a metal box using a wooden board for insulation. The box must have a class D  
ground.  
2. Run the transceiver cable to the controller control panel through metal conduit. Provide a class D  
ground for the conduit.  
3. Install a hub inside the controller control panel using a metal, U shaped bracket. Use a hub that is  
electrically isolated from the metal mounts, such as by using rubber feet. Ground the hub mounts to  
the control panel. The control panel must be provided with a class D ground.  
Transceiver isolation plate  
(wooden board)  
Transceiver installation box  
Coaxial cable  
Transceiver cable  
(AUI cable)  
Transceiver cable  
(AUI cable)  
Transceiver main housing  
Conduit  
Conduit  
U shaped hub mounting bracket  
Hub  
10BASE-T cable  
Controller control panel  
Controller control panel  
Installation example of network equipment in an FL-net  
15  
15-61  
Chapter 15: Appendix  
[5] Wiring and grounding through wiring ducts and conduits  
Shown below are methods for wiring and grounding through wiring ducts and conduits used on an FL-  
net.  
Observe the precautions below when wiring  
1. When wiring using wiring ducts, separate the power lines and signal lines using a physical separator.  
The wiring duct itself (including the lid and separator) must be grounded with a class D ground.  
2. When using conduits, provide one conduit for the power lines and one for the signal lines. Use  
conduit that complies with JIS-C-8305 and create a class D ground.  
Separator  
Wiring duct  
Communication  
cable  
Analog I/O signal lines  
I/O signal lines  
Power lines  
Class D ground  
Wiring example when using a wiring duct  
Conduit  
Signal cable  
Class D ground  
Wiring example using a conduit  
15  
15-62  
Chapter 15: Appendix  
15-8 FL-net installation check sheet  
FL-net installation check sheet  
Station number:  
Communication line name:  
Item to check  
Date checked:  
Checked by:  
Are all the connectors securely locked?  
Are the cable curve radiuses within the specified value?  
Are the connectors protected by jackets, etc.?  
Are the wiring DI numbers (line numbers) attached to the lines? Are they  
correct?  
Is any communication cable lying under a heavy object?  
Is any communication cable bundled with a power line?  
Is the AUI cable length for repeaters always 2 m or less? Is the transceiver  
cable length less than 50 m?  
Is the coaxial cable (10BASE-5) length less than 500 m?  
Is the coaxial cable properly grounded using a ground terminal?  
Is the shield on the coaxial cable isolated from the transceiver?  
Are the terminating resistors properly installed on the coaxial cable?  
Are the number of layers of hubs and repeaters within the specified values?  
Is a straight cable (not a cross cable) used for the twisted pair cable?  
Is a category 5 cable used for the twisted pair cable and is it less than 100 m  
long?  
Are the GND terminals on the equipment properly connected?  
Is each device securely attached to its base?  
Is the rack panel securely attached to a control panel?  
Is the AUI cable securely locked?  
Is excessive force being placed on the AUI cable installation section by a  
door?  
Are the RJ45 connectors securely installed?  
Are the connectors for the AUI cables securely locked?  
Are the line numbers attached?  
Are the transceivers properly installed at marked positions on the cable?  
Are the SQE switches on the transceivers properly set as per the  
specifications?  
15  
Are the hubs properly secured?  
Are there any incorrect settings on the HB/MAU select switches on the hubs?  
Does the power supplied to hubs comply with the specifications for voltage?  
- Make sure to check these items and fill in the sheet when modifying or changing the system.  
- Put an O (OK) or an X (NG) in the result column and enter the rotary switch number and ON/OFF  
status of dip switches inside the parenthesis ( ) for the setting switches.  
15-63  
Alphabetical Index  
[A]  
Address allocation of I/O relay ....................................................................................................... 5-4  
Allocation of available areas for the transmission buffer................................................................ 9-5  
Area 1 and area 2 ........................................................................................................................ 7-17  
Areas that can be allocated as the common memory area............................................................ 8-4  
Assign the communication management area ............................................................................... 8-3  
[B]  
Basic configuration....................................................................................................................... 15-6  
Basic data ...................................................................................................................................... 8-3  
Basic format of computer link commands .................................................................................... 9-19  
Basic functions ........................................................................................................................... 15-26  
Before you conclude that the machine is faulty ........................................................................... 13-1  
Brief description of the Ethernet................................................................................................... 15-1  
[C]  
Clean log data .............................................................................................................................. 7-29  
Coaxial cable ............................................................................................................................. 15-35  
Coaxial connectors .................................................................................................................... 15-35  
Coaxial/optical converter, repeater ............................................................................................ 15-39  
Commands................................................................................................................................... 9-15  
Common memory ........................................................................................................................ 7-16  
Common memory area ........................................................................................................... 8-1, 8-2  
- For the JW20H or J-board (Z-300 series) .................................................................................... 8-4  
For the JW30H or J-board (Z-500 series) .................................................................................... 8-5  
- For the JW50H/70H/100H ........................................................................................................... 8-6  
Communication control ................................................................................................................ 10-1  
Communication format ................................................................................................................. 9-19  
Communication management table ............................................................................................. 7-13  
Communication protocol standards ........................................................................................... 15-12  
Communication specifications ..................................................................................................... 14-1  
Communication time .................................................................................................................... 8-13  
Computer link error code table..................................................................................................... 9-42  
Computer link function ................................................................................................................. 9-16  
Computer link to send and receive data ...................................................................................... 9-17  
Configuration combining local and long distance distribution .................................................... 15-10  
Configuration of a large-scale network ........................................................................................ 15-7  
Configuration of a long distance distribution system.................................................................... 15-8  
Configuration of local concentrations ........................................................................................... 15-9  
Connection of 10BASE2 ................................................................................................................ 6-3  
Connecting to standard network .................................................................................................. 9-45  
Connection of 10BASE5 ................................................................................................................ 6-8  
Connecting the transceiver cable................................................................................................... 6-2  
Connection of JW-20FL5 ............................................................................................................... 6-2  
Connection of JW-50FL ................................................................................................................. 6-8  
Connection of Z-336J..................................................................................................................... 6-5  
I
I-1  
Connection/Wiring.......................................................................................................................... 6-1  
Control data ............................................................................................................................... 15-28  
Control message sequence number of the FL-net..................................................................... 15-28  
Current value monitor of the timers/counters (COM = 23(H)) ........................................................ 9-28  
Cyclic transfer and data area ....................................................................................................... 7-15  
Cyclic transfer process................................................................................................................. 7-15  
Cyclic transfer .............................................................................................................. 7-10, 7-15, 8-1  
[D]  
Data area and memory ................................................................................................................ 7-12  
Data communication type .............................................................................................................. 7-9  
Definition of network systems .................................................................................................... 15-12  
Description of the FL-net................................................................................................................ 7-6  
Descriptions of each command.................................................................................................... 9-23  
Details of each of the parameters ................................................................................................ 12-2  
Details of the support messages.................................................................................................. 7-21  
Differences between a general-purpose Ethernet and FL-net ................................................... 15-11  
Display panel ............................................................................................................................... 13-6  
[E]  
Enable/disable the use of the transmission buffer ....................................................................... 12-2  
Equipment layout ........................................................................................................................... 6-1  
Error indicators on the display panel............................................................................................ 13-6  
Error status flag............................................................................................................................ 10-4  
Ethernet ................................................................................................................................ 7-1, 15-1  
Example operation ....................................................................................................................... 9-46  
Examples of system configurations ............................................................................................. 15-5  
Execution condition ...................................................................................................................... 9-21  
External dimension drawings ........................................................................................... 14-2 to 14-5  
Expansion network connection .................................................................................................... 9-45  
[F]  
FA link layer status....................................................................................................................... 10-5  
FL-net data format ..................................................................................................................... 15-15  
FL-net header format ................................................................................................................. 15-17  
FL-net installation check sheet .................................................................................................. 15-63  
FL-net Local node management table ....................................................................................... 15-26  
FL-net Participating node management table ............................................................................ 15-27  
FL-net port number .................................................................................................................... 15-14  
FL-net protocol ............................................................................................................................... 7-7  
FL-net specifications .................................................................................................................... 14-1  
FL-net sub net mask .................................................................................................................. 15-14  
FL-net transaction code ............................................................................................................. 15-17  
FL-net transfer system .................................................................................................................. 7-7  
FL-net............................................................................................................................................. 7-6  
Flow of the token........................................................................................................................ 15-20  
Function ....................................................................................................................................... 9-45  
I
I-2  
[G]  
General network problems and countermeasures ....................................................................... 13-2  
General precautions related to the FL-net ................................................................................... 13-5  
General specifications...................................................................................................... 14-1 to 14-4  
Ground terminal of a coaxial cable ............................................................................................ 15-37  
Grounding the FL-net system .................................................................................................... 15-58  
Guarantee of simultaneity ............................................................................................................ 7-18  
[H]  
Halt and release halting of PC (COM = F8(H)) .............................................................................. 9-41  
Halt PC......................................................................................................................................... 9-23  
Handling precautions ..................................................................................................................... 2-1  
Hierarchical structure of the communication protocols .............................................................. 15-12  
How to check an IP address using the ping function on a personal computer ............................ 13-4  
How to set parameters ................................................................................................................. 12-3  
Hub ............................................................................................................................................ 15-40  
[I]  
Installation check sheet............................................................................................................. 15-63  
Installation of a ground terminal for a coaxial cable ................................................................... 15-55  
Installation of a transceiver cable............................................................................................... 15-52  
Installation of an FL-net network ................................................................................................ 15-42  
Installation of coaxial connectors ............................................................................................... 15-43  
Installation of JW-20FL5/20FLT ..................................................................................................... 5-1  
Installation of JW-50FL .................................................................................................................. 5-8  
Installation of network equipment in an FL-net .......................................................................... 15-61  
Installation of terminators (terminating resistors) ....................................................................... 15-51  
Installation of Z-336J...................................................................................................................... 5-2  
Installation ...................................................................................................................................... 5-1  
- JW-20FL5/20FLT ......................................................................................................................... 5-1  
Z-336J .......................................................................................................................................... 5-2  
- JW-50FL ...................................................................................................................................... 5-8  
Installing an Ethernet cable............................................................................................................ 6-1  
Interval between frames............................................................................................................. 15-22  
IP addresses on an Ethernet ......................................................................................................... 7-5  
IP addresses on the FL-net........................................................................................................ 15-13  
[J]  
Joining and leaving an FL-net network ...................................................................................... 15-23  
[L]  
Leaving an FL-net network ........................................................................................................ 15-25  
Local node management table............................................................................................ 7-13, 10-5  
I
[M]  
Major coaxial cable installation specifications............................................................................ 15-43  
Management data ...................................................................................................................... 15-28  
Maximum number of boards to mount ........................................................................................... 5-3  
I-3  
Memory address expression format............................................................................................. 9-20  
Message other than transmission ................................................................................................ 12-2  
Message sending procedures and data reception details.............................................................. 9-2  
Message transaction codes and execution conditions................................................................... 9-8  
Message transfer ................................................................................................7-10, 7-11, 7-19, 9-1  
Message transfer process............................................................................................................ 7-19  
Monitor PC operation status (COM = E8(H)) ................................................................................ 9-40  
Monitor register (COM = 24(H)) .................................................................................................... 9-29  
Monitor relay (COM = 20(H)) ........................................................................................................ 9-25  
Multi-port transceiver ................................................................................................................. 15-33  
[N]  
Name and function of each part ..................................................................................................... 4-1  
Network control of the FL-net..................................................................................................... 15-19  
Network management table ................................................................................................ 7-14, 10-6  
Node name .................................................................................................................................... 8-3  
Node number ................................................................................................................................. 7-8  
Node status control .................................................................................................................... 15-26  
Number of modules and their node numbers................................................................................ 7-8  
[O]  
Operation of SEND/RECEIVE instruction .................................................................................... 11-2  
Operation status flag .................................................................................................................... 10-3  
Optical Ethernet specifications..................................................................................................... 15-4  
Other Ethernet specifications ....................................................................................................... 15-4  
Outline of the cyclic transfer process ........................................................................................... 7-15  
Outline of the FL-net data format ............................................................................................... 15-15  
Outline of the grounding procedures for the FL-net system....................................................... 15-58  
Outline of the message transfer process ..................................................................................... 7-19  
Outline............................................................................................................................................ 1-1  
[P]  
Parameter area ............................................................................................................................. 8-3  
Parameter settings for cyclic transfers ........................................................................................... 8-7  
Parameters .................................................................................................................................. 12-1  
Participating node management table ................................................................................ 7-14, 10-6  
Participating nodes list flag .......................................................................................................... 10-2  
Participation in the FL-net .......................................................................................................... 15-23  
Parts needed to build a network ................................................................................................ 15-29  
Parts needed to configure an Ethernet ...................................................................................... 15-29  
Parts related to 10BASE5 .......................................................................................................... 15-30  
PC memory space ......................................................................................................................... 9-9  
- For the JW20H or J-board (Z-300 series) ........................................................................... 9-5, 9-10  
For the JW30H or J-board (Z-500 series) ........................................................................... 9-6, 9-11  
- For the JW50H/70H/100H ......................................................................................................... 9-14  
PC operation status ..................................................................................................................... 9-40  
Physical implementations of an FL-net ...................................................................................... 15-13  
Ping function ................................................................................................................................ 13-4  
I
I-4  
Precautions for laying and hooking up ....................................................................................... 15-42  
Principles of the FL-net system.................................................................................................. 15-11  
Problems and countermeasures (when unable to communicate) ................................................ 13-2  
Problems and countermeasures (when communications are unstable) ...................................... 13-3  
[R]  
Read byte-block data ................................................................................................................... 7-21  
Read data (COM = A2(H)) ............................................................................................................. 9-36  
Read log data............................................................................................................................... 7-29  
Read network parameter ............................................................................................................. 7-25  
Read out the system memory (COM = 44(H)) ............................................................................... 9-32  
Read out write enable mode (COM = E9(H)) ................................................................................. 9-23  
Read profile.................................................................................................................................. 7-28  
Read program (COM = 04(H)) ....................................................................................................... 9-34  
Read time (COM = A3(H)) ............................................................................................................. 9-38  
Read word-block data .................................................................................................................. 7-23  
Receive ........................................................................................................................................ 11-5  
Receive (received to transmission buffer)...................................................................................... 9-3  
Receive (response details) .......................................................................................................... 9-18  
Received control data ................................................................................................................ 15-28  
Relay connector ......................................................................................................................... 15-36  
Release halting PC ...................................................................................................................... 9-41  
Remote monitor function .............................................................................................................. 9-45  
Remote programming and remote monitor functions................................................................... 9-45  
Remote programming function..................................................................................................... 9-45  
Repeater .................................................................................................................................... 15-34  
Reset counter............................................................................................................................... 9-27  
Reset relay ................................................................................................................................... 9-26  
Reset timer................................................................................................................................... 9-27  
Return message........................................................................................................................... 7-30  
Round time when a communication error occures....................................................................... 8-13  
[S]  
Selecting the write enable mode (COM = F9(H)) ........................................................................... 9-24  
Send............................................................................................................................................. 11-2  
SEND/RECEIVE instruction time-out time ..................................................................................... 8-3  
SEND/RECEIVE function............................................................................................................. 11-1  
Sending control data .................................................................................................................. 15-28  
Sending details (command) ......................................................................................................... 9-17  
Set data (COM = B2(H)) ................................................................................................................ 9-37  
Set reset relay (COM = 30(H)) ....................................................................................................... 9-26  
Set/reset timer/counter (COM = 32(H)) .......................................................................................... 9-27  
Set time (COM = B3(H))................................................................................................................. 9-39  
Setting procedures ......................................................................................................................... 8-3  
Setting the computer link to send and receive data ..................................................................... 9-17  
Settings related to cyclic transfers ................................................................................................. 8-3  
Settings related to message transfers ........................................................................................... 8-3  
Small scale configuration ............................................................................................................. 15-5  
I
I-5  
Specifications ............................................................................................................................... 14-1  
- JW-20FL5/20FLT ....................................................................................................................... 14-1  
Z-336J ........................................................................................................................................ 14-3  
- JW-50FL .................................................................................................................................... 14-4  
Start switch .................................................................................................................................... 8-3  
Start, stop commands .................................................................................................................. 7-27  
Status management of the FL-net ............................................................................................. 15-28  
Sub net mask ............................................................................................................................. 15-14  
Support messages ....................................................................................................................... 7-20  
System configuration guide.......................................................................................................... 15-1  
System configuration ..................................................................................................................... 3-1  
[T]  
Table of commands ..................................................................................................................... 9-22  
Table of parameters ..................................................................................................................... 12-1  
Table of support messages.......................................................................................................... 7-20  
Table of transaction code........................................................................................................... 15-18  
TCP/IP, UDP/IP communication protocols................................................................................. 15-14  
Terminator (terminating resistor)..................................................................................... 15-36, 15-51  
The number of modules and their node numbers .......................................................................... 7-8  
Timeout time for SEND/RECEIVE instructions ............................................................................ 11-8  
Token and data .......................................................................................................................... 15-21  
Token control of the FL-net ........................................................................................................ 15-19  
Token round time ......................................................................................................................... 8-13  
Token ................................................................................................................................ 7-15, 15-19  
Token frame ................................................................................................................................. 7-15  
Token monitor time ...................................................................................................................... 12-2  
Top address  
- For the JW20H or J-board (Z-300 series) .................................................................................... 8-8  
For the JW30H or J-board (Z-500 series) .................................................................................... 8-9  
- For the JW50H/70H/100H ......................................................................................................... 8-11  
Transaction code ......................................................................................................................... 12-2  
Transceiver cable....................................................................................................................... 15-37  
Transceiver ..................................................................................................................... 15-30, 15-45  
Transfer cycle .............................................................................................................................. 7-11  
Transceiver (tap type) ................................................................................................................ 15-31  
Transceiver (connector type) ..................................................................................................... 15-32  
Transfer data volume ................................................................................................................... 7-10  
Transfer transmission message ................................................................................................... 7-30  
Transmission buffer (set the sending details) ................................................................................ 9-4  
Transmission messages .............................................................................................................. 12-2  
Transmit the data ......................................................................................................................... 9-17  
Treatment....................................................................................................................................... 2-1  
Transmission buffer ....................................................................................................................... 9-4  
Troubleshooting ........................................................................................................................... 13-1  
Two-layer communication with the Ethernet ................................................................................ 9-43  
I
I-6  
[U]  
Upper layer status ........................................................................................................................ 10-5  
Use guide ....................................................................................................................................... 7-1  
Use of virtual address space and PC memory space .................................................................... 9-9  
[W]  
Wiring 10BASE5 coaxial cable .................................................................................................. 15-42  
Wiring and grounding through wiring ducts and conduits .......................................................... 15-62  
Wiring power lines and grounding equipment ............................................................................ 15-59  
Wiring precautions ......................................................................................................................... 2-1  
Wiring the power lines and grounding the network equipment in an FL-net .............................. 15-60  
Wiring the power source ................................................................................................................ 6-3  
Wiring ............................................................................................................................................. 6-1  
Word addresses used for the top address ..................................................................................... 8-8  
Write byte-block data ................................................................................................................... 7-22  
Write enable mode ....................................................................................................................... 9-21  
Write in register (COM = 34(H)) ..................................................................................................... 9-30  
Write network parameter.............................................................................................................. 7-26  
Write precautions ........................................................................................................................... 2-1  
Write program (COM = 14(H)) ....................................................................................................... 9-35  
Write same data to register (COM = 35(H)) ................................................................................... 9-31  
Write to the system memory (COM = 54(H)) ................................................................................. 9-33  
Write word-block data .................................................................................................................. 7-24  
[10]  
10BASE2 ..................................................................................................................................... 15-4  
10BASE5 specifications ............................................................................................................... 15-2  
10BASE5 system ........................................................................................................................... 7-1  
10BASE5/10BASE-T converter ................................................................................................. 15-38  
10BASE-T (UTP) ....................................................................................................................... 15-56  
10BASE-T (UTP) cable .............................................................................................................. 15-56  
10BASE-T cable ........................................................................................................................ 15-41  
10BASE-T/optical converter, repeater ....................................................................................... 15-41  
10BASE-T related items ............................................................................................................ 15-40  
10BASE-T specifications ............................................................................................................. 15-3  
10BASE-T system.......................................................................................................................... 7-4  
I
I-7  

Lindy 38021 User Manual
Master Lock Br150ce User Manual
Panasonic Cu E21dkr User Manual
Ricoh Aficio 1515 User Manual
Savin C7570 User Manual
Schumacher Ss 210a User Manual
Sharp Ar 287 User Manual
Sterling Power Products Pt2415 User Manual
Whirlpool Acp102ps2 User Manual
Whirlpool Acu102 User Manual